From 74aab3c0a0983462f24decead41583ce0fe86014 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Brodie Thiesfield Date: Tue, 30 Jun 2009 08:59:54 +0000 Subject: fixing mime-types and line endings --- SimpleIni.h | 6464 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- ini.syn | 72 +- simpleini.doxy | 2642 ++++++++++----------- test1-expected.ini | 144 +- test1-input.ini | 146 +- testsi-EUCJP.ini | 104 +- testsi-SJIS.ini | 102 +- testsi-UTF8.ini | 100 +- 8 files changed, 4887 insertions(+), 4887 deletions(-) diff --git a/SimpleIni.h b/SimpleIni.h index ae42d63..390b9b1 100644 --- a/SimpleIni.h +++ b/SimpleIni.h @@ -1,3232 +1,3232 @@ -/** @mainpage - - -
Library SimpleIni -
File SimpleIni.h -
Author Brodie Thiesfield [code at jellycan dot com] -
Source http://code.jellycan.com/simpleini/ -
Version 4.11 -
- - Jump to the @link CSimpleIniTempl CSimpleIni @endlink interface documentation. - - @section intro INTRODUCTION - - This component allows an INI-style configuration file to be used on both - Windows and Linux/Unix. It is fast, simple and source code using this - component will compile unchanged on either OS. - - - @section features FEATURES - - - MIT Licence allows free use in all software (including GPL and commercial) - - multi-platform (Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2K/XP/2003, Windows CE, Linux, Unix) - - loading and saving of INI-style configuration files - - configuration files can have any newline format on all platforms - - liberal acceptance of file format - - key/values with no section - - removal of whitespace around sections, keys and values - - support for multi-line values (values with embedded newline characters) - - optional support for multiple keys with the same name - - optional case-insensitive sections and keys (for ASCII characters only) - - saves files with sections and keys in the same order as they were loaded - - preserves comments on the file, section and keys where possible. - - supports both char or wchar_t programming interfaces - - supports both MBCS (system locale) and UTF-8 file encodings - - system locale does not need to be UTF-8 on Linux/Unix to load UTF-8 file - - support for non-ASCII characters in section, keys, values and comments - - support for non-standard character types or file encodings - via user-written converter classes - - support for adding/modifying values programmatically - - compiles cleanly in the following compilers: - - Windows/VC6 (warning level 3) - - Windows/VC.NET 2003 (warning level 4) - - Windows/VC 2005 (warning level 4) - - Linux/gcc (-Wall) - - - @section usage USAGE SUMMARY - - -# Define the appropriate symbol for the converter you wish to use and - include the SimpleIni.h header file. If no specific converter is defined - then the default converter is used. The default conversion mode uses - SI_CONVERT_WIN32 on Windows and SI_CONVERT_GENERIC on all other - platforms. If you are using ICU then SI_CONVERT_ICU is supported on all - platforms. - -# Declare an instance the appropriate class. Note that the following - definitions are just shortcuts for commonly used types. Other types - (PRUnichar, unsigned short, unsigned char) are also possible. - -
Interface Case-sensitive Load UTF-8 Load MBCS Typedef -
SI_CONVERT_GENERIC -
char No Yes Yes #1 CSimpleIniA -
char Yes Yes Yes CSimpleIniCaseA -
wchar_t No Yes Yes CSimpleIniW -
wchar_t Yes Yes Yes CSimpleIniCaseW -
SI_CONVERT_WIN32 -
char No No #2 Yes CSimpleIniA -
char Yes Yes Yes CSimpleIniCaseA -
wchar_t No Yes Yes CSimpleIniW -
wchar_t Yes Yes Yes CSimpleIniCaseW -
SI_CONVERT_ICU -
char No Yes Yes CSimpleIniA -
char Yes Yes Yes CSimpleIniCaseA -
UChar No Yes Yes CSimpleIniW -
UChar Yes Yes Yes CSimpleIniCaseW -
- #1 On Windows you are better to use CSimpleIniA with SI_CONVERT_WIN32.
- #2 Only affects Windows. On Windows this uses MBCS functions and - so may fold case incorrectly leading to uncertain results. - -# Call Load() or LoadFile() to load and parse the INI configuration file - -# Access and modify the data of the file using the following functions - -
GetAllSections Return all section names -
GetAllKeys Return all key names within a section -
GetAllValues Return all values within a section & key -
GetSection Return all key names and values in a section -
GetSectionSize Return the number of keys in a section -
GetValue Return a value for a section & key -
SetValue Add or update a value for a section & key -
Delete Remove a section, or a key from a section -
- -# Call Save() or SaveFile() to save the INI configuration data - - @section iostreams IO STREAMS - - SimpleIni supports reading from and writing to STL IO streams. Enable this - by defining SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS before including the SimpleIni.h header - file. Ensure that if the streams are backed by a file (e.g. ifstream or - ofstream) then the flag ios_base::binary has been used when the file was - opened. - - @section multiline MULTI-LINE VALUES - - Values that span multiple lines are created using the following format. - - 
-        key = <<
-
-    Note the following:
-    - The text used for ENDTAG can be anything and is used to find
-      where the multi-line text ends.
-    - The newline after ENDTAG in the start tag, and the newline
-      before ENDTAG in the end tag is not included in the data value.
-    - The ending tag must be on it's own line with no whitespace before
-      or after it.
-    - The multi-line value is modified at load so that each line in the value
-      is delimited by a single '\\n' character on all platforms. At save time
-      it will be converted into the newline format used by the current
-      platform.
-
-    @section comments COMMENTS
-
-    Comments are preserved in the file within the following restrictions:
-    - Every file may have a single "file comment". It must start with the
-      first character in the file, and will end with the first non-comment
-      line in the file.
-    - Every section may have a single "section comment". It will start
-      with the first comment line following the file comment, or the last
-      data entry. It ends at the beginning of the section.
-    - Every key may have a single "key comment". This comment will start
-      with the first comment line following the section start, or the file
-      comment if there is no section name.
-    - Comments are set at the time that the file, section or key is first
-      created. The only way to modify a comment on a section or a key is to
-      delete that entry and recreate it with the new comment. There is no
-      way to change the file comment.
-
-    @section save SAVE ORDER
-
-    The sections and keys are written out in the same order as they were
-    read in from the file. Sections and keys added to the data after the
-    file has been loaded will be added to the end of the file when it is
-    written. There is no way to specify the location of a section or key
-    other than in first-created, first-saved order.
-
-    @section notes NOTES
-
-    - To load UTF-8 data on Windows 95, you need to use Microsoft Layer for
-      Unicode, or SI_CONVERT_GENERIC, or SI_CONVERT_ICU.
-    - When using SI_CONVERT_GENERIC, ConvertUTF.c must be compiled and linked.
-    - When using SI_CONVERT_ICU, ICU header files must be on the include
-      path and icuuc.lib must be linked in.
-    - To load a UTF-8 file on Windows AND expose it with SI_CHAR == char,
-      you should use SI_CONVERT_GENERIC.
-    - The collation (sorting) order used for sections and keys returned from
-      iterators is NOT DEFINED. If collation order of the text is important
-      then it should be done yourself by either supplying a replacement
-      SI_STRLESS class, or by sorting the strings external to this library.
-    - Usage of the  header on Windows can be disabled by defining
-      SI_NO_MBCS. This is defined automatically on Windows CE platforms.
-
-
-    @section licence MIT LICENCE
-
-    The licence text below is the boilerplate "MIT Licence" used from:
-    http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php
-
-    Copyright (c) 2006-2008, Brodie Thiesfield
-
-    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
-    of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
-    in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
-    to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
-    copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished
-    to do so, subject to the following conditions:
-
-    The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
-    all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-
-    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-    IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
-    FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
-    COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
-    IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
-    CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-*/
-
-#ifndef INCLUDED_SimpleIni_h
-#define INCLUDED_SimpleIni_h
-
-#if defined(_MSC_VER) && (_MSC_VER >= 1020)
-# pragma once
-#endif
-
-// Disable these warnings in MSVC:
-//  4127 "conditional expression is constant" as the conversion classes trigger
-//  it with the statement if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(char)). This test will
-//  be optimized away in a release build.
-//  4503 'insert' : decorated name length exceeded, name was truncated
-//  4702 "unreachable code" as the MS STL header causes it in release mode.
-//  Again, the code causing the warning will be cleaned up by the compiler.
-//  4786 "identifier truncated to 256 characters" as this is thrown hundreds
-//  of times VC6 as soon as STL is used.
-#ifdef _MSC_VER
-# pragma warning (push)
-# pragma warning (disable: 4127 4503 4702 4786)
-#endif
-
-#include 
-#include 
-#include 
-#include 
-#include 
-#include 
-
-#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-# include 
-#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-
-#ifdef _DEBUG
-# ifndef assert
-#  include 
-# endif
-# define SI_ASSERT(x)   assert(x)
-#else
-# define SI_ASSERT(x)
-#endif
-
-enum SI_Error {
-    SI_OK       =  0,   //!< No error
-    SI_UPDATED  =  1,   //!< An existing value was updated
-    SI_INSERTED =  2,   //!< A new value was inserted
-
-    // note: test for any error with (retval < 0)
-    SI_FAIL     = -1,   //!< Generic failure
-    SI_NOMEM    = -2,   //!< Out of memory error
-    SI_FILE     = -3    //!< File error (see errno for detail error)
-};
-
-#define SI_UTF8_SIGNATURE     "\xEF\xBB\xBF"
-
-#ifdef _WIN32
-# define SI_NEWLINE_A   "\r\n"
-# define SI_NEWLINE_W   L"\r\n"
-#else // !_WIN32
-# define SI_NEWLINE_A   "\n"
-# define SI_NEWLINE_W   L"\n"
-#endif // _WIN32
-
-#if defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
-# include 
-#endif
-
-#if defined(_WIN32)
-# define SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
-# define SI_WCHAR_T     wchar_t
-#elif defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
-# define SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
-# define SI_WCHAR_T     UChar
-#endif
-
-
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-//                              MAIN TEMPLATE CLASS
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-/** Simple INI file reader.
-
-    This can be instantiated with the choice of unicode or native characterset,
-    and case sensitive or insensitive comparisons of section and key names.
-    The supported combinations are pre-defined with the following typedefs:
-
-    
-        
Interface   Case-sensitive  Typedef
-        
char        No              CSimpleIniA
-        
char        Yes             CSimpleIniCaseA
-        
wchar_t     No              CSimpleIniW
-        
wchar_t     Yes             CSimpleIniCaseW
-    

-
-    Note that using other types for the SI_CHAR is supported. For instance,
-    unsigned char, unsigned short, etc. Note that where the alternative type
-    is a different size to char/wchar_t you may need to supply new helper
-    classes for SI_STRLESS and SI_CONVERTER.
- */
-template
-class CSimpleIniTempl
-{
-public:
-    /** key entry */
-    struct Entry {
-        const SI_CHAR * pItem;
-        const SI_CHAR * pComment;
-        int             nOrder;
-
-        Entry(const SI_CHAR * a_pszItem = NULL, int a_nOrder = 0)
-            : pItem(a_pszItem)
-            , pComment(NULL)
-            , nOrder(a_nOrder)
-        { }
-        Entry(const SI_CHAR * a_pszItem, const SI_CHAR * a_pszComment, int a_nOrder)
-            : pItem(a_pszItem)
-            , pComment(a_pszComment)
-            , nOrder(a_nOrder)
-        { }
-        Entry(const Entry & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
-        Entry & operator=(const Entry & rhs) {
-            pItem    = rhs.pItem;
-            pComment = rhs.pComment;
-            nOrder   = rhs.nOrder;
-            return *this;
-        }
-
-#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1200
-        /** STL of VC6 doesn't allow me to specify my own comparator for list::sort() */
-        bool operator<(const Entry & rhs) const { return LoadOrder()(*this, rhs); }
-        bool operator>(const Entry & rhs) const { return LoadOrder()(rhs, *this); }
-#endif
-
-        /** Strict less ordering by name of key only */
-        struct KeyOrder : std::binary_function {
-            bool operator()(const Entry & lhs, const Entry & rhs) const {
-                const static SI_STRLESS isLess = SI_STRLESS();
-                return isLess(lhs.pItem, rhs.pItem);
-            }
-        };
-
-        /** Strict less ordering by order, and then name of key */
-        struct LoadOrder : std::binary_function {
-            bool operator()(const Entry & lhs, const Entry & rhs) const {
-                if (lhs.nOrder != rhs.nOrder) {
-                    return lhs.nOrder < rhs.nOrder;
-                }
-                return KeyOrder()(lhs.pItem, rhs.pItem);
-            }
-        };
-    };
-
-    /** map keys to values */
-    typedef std::multimap TKeyVal;
-
-    /** map sections to key/value map */
-    typedef std::map TSection;
-
-    /** set of dependent string pointers. Note that these pointers are
-        dependent on memory owned by CSimpleIni.
-    */
-    typedef std::list TNamesDepend;
-
-    /** interface definition for the OutputWriter object to pass to Save()
-        in order to output the INI file data.
-    */
-    class OutputWriter {
-    public:
-        OutputWriter() { }
-        virtual ~OutputWriter() { }
-        virtual void Write(const char * a_pBuf) = 0;
-    private:
-        OutputWriter(const OutputWriter &);             // disable
-        OutputWriter & operator=(const OutputWriter &); // disable
-    };
-
-    /** OutputWriter class to write the INI data to a file */
-    class FileWriter : public OutputWriter {
-        FILE * m_file;
-    public:
-        FileWriter(FILE * a_file) : m_file(a_file) { }
-        void Write(const char * a_pBuf) {
-            fputs(a_pBuf, m_file);
-        }
-    private:
-        FileWriter(const FileWriter &);             // disable
-        FileWriter & operator=(const FileWriter &); // disable
-    };
-
-    /** OutputWriter class to write the INI data to a string */
-    class StringWriter : public OutputWriter {
-        std::string & m_string;
-    public:
-        StringWriter(std::string & a_string) : m_string(a_string) { }
-        void Write(const char * a_pBuf) {
-            m_string.append(a_pBuf);
-        }
-    private:
-        StringWriter(const StringWriter &);             // disable
-        StringWriter & operator=(const StringWriter &); // disable
-    };
-
-#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-    /** OutputWriter class to write the INI data to an ostream */
-    class StreamWriter : public OutputWriter {
-        std::ostream & m_ostream;
-    public:
-        StreamWriter(std::ostream & a_ostream) : m_ostream(a_ostream) { }
-        void Write(const char * a_pBuf) {
-            m_ostream << a_pBuf;
-        }
-    private:
-        StreamWriter(const StreamWriter &);             // disable
-        StreamWriter & operator=(const StreamWriter &); // disable
-    };
-#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-
-    /** Characterset conversion utility class to convert strings to the
-        same format as is used for the storage.
-    */
-    class Converter : private SI_CONVERTER {
-    public:
-        Converter(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : SI_CONVERTER(a_bStoreIsUtf8) {
-            m_scratch.resize(1024);
-        }
-        Converter(const Converter & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
-        Converter & operator=(const Converter & rhs) {
-            m_scratch = rhs.m_scratch;
-            return *this;
-        }
-        bool ConvertToStore(const SI_CHAR * a_pszString) {
-            size_t uLen = SizeToStore(a_pszString);
-            if (uLen == (size_t)(-1)) {
-                return false;
-            }
-            while (uLen > m_scratch.size()) {
-                m_scratch.resize(m_scratch.size() * 2);
-            }
-            return SI_CONVERTER::ConvertToStore(
-                a_pszString,
-                const_cast(m_scratch.data()),
-                m_scratch.size());
-        }
-        const char * Data() { return m_scratch.data(); }
-    private:
-        std::string m_scratch;
-    };
-
-public:
-    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-
-    /** Default constructor.
-
-        @param a_bIsUtf8     See the method SetUnicode() for details.
-        @param a_bMultiKey   See the method SetMultiKey() for details.
-        @param a_bMultiLine  See the method SetMultiLine() for details.
-     */
-    CSimpleIniTempl(
-        bool a_bIsUtf8 = false,
-        bool a_bMultiKey = false,
-        bool a_bMultiLine = false
-        );
-
-    /** Destructor */
-    ~CSimpleIniTempl();
-
-    /** Deallocate all memory stored by this object */
-    void Reset();
-
-    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-    /** @{ @name Settings */
-
-    /** Set the storage format of the INI data. This affects both the loading
-        and saving of the INI data using all of the Load/Save API functions.
-        This value cannot be changed after any INI data has been loaded.
-
-        If the file is not set to Unicode (UTF-8), then the data encoding is
-        assumed to be the OS native encoding. This encoding is the system
-        locale on Linux/Unix and the legacy MBCS encoding on Windows NT/2K/XP.
-        If the storage format is set to Unicode then the file will be loaded
-        as UTF-8 encoded data regardless of the native file encoding. If
-        SI_CHAR == char then all of the char* parameters take and return UTF-8
-        encoded data regardless of the system locale.
-
-        \param a_bIsUtf8     Assume UTF-8 encoding for the source?
-     */
-    void SetUnicode(bool a_bIsUtf8 = true) {
-        if (!m_pData) m_bStoreIsUtf8 = a_bIsUtf8;
-    }
-
-    /** Get the storage format of the INI data. */
-    bool IsUnicode() const { return m_bStoreIsUtf8; }
-
-    /** Should multiple identical keys be permitted in the file. If set to false
-        then the last value encountered will be used as the value of the key.
-        If set to true, then all values will be available to be queried. For
-        example, with the following input:
-
-        
-        [section]
-        test=value1
-        test=value2
-        

-
-        Then with SetMultiKey(true), both of the values "value1" and "value2"
-        will be returned for the key test. If SetMultiKey(false) is used, then
-        the value for "test" will only be "value2". This value may be changed
-        at any time.
-
-        \param a_bAllowMultiKey  Allow multi-keys in the source?
-     */
-    void SetMultiKey(bool a_bAllowMultiKey = true) {
-        m_bAllowMultiKey = a_bAllowMultiKey;
-    }
-
-    /** Get the storage format of the INI data. */
-    bool IsMultiKey() const { return m_bAllowMultiKey; }
-
-    /** Should data values be permitted to span multiple lines in the file. If
-        set to false then the multi-line construct <<
-            SI_CHAR     FORMAT
-            char        same format as when loaded (MBCS or UTF-8)
-            wchar_t     UTF-8
-            other       UTF-8
-        
-
-        Note that comments from the original data is preserved as per the
-        documentation on comments. The order of the sections and values
-        from the original file will be preserved.
-
-        Any data prepended or appended to the output device must use the the
-        same format (MBCS or UTF-8). You may use the GetConverter() method to
-        convert text to the correct format regardless of the output format
-        being used by SimpleIni.
-
-        To add a BOM to UTF-8 data, write it out manually at the very beginning
-        like is done in SaveFile when a_bUseBOM is true.
-
-        @param a_oOutput    Output writer to write the data to.
-
-        @param a_bAddSignature  Prepend the UTF-8 BOM if the output data is in
-                            UTF-8 format. If it is not UTF-8 then this value is
-                            ignored. Do not set this to true if anything has
-                            already been written to the OutputWriter.
-
-        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
-     */
-    SI_Error Save(
-        OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
-        bool            a_bAddSignature = false
-        ) const;
-
-#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-    /** Save the INI data to an ostream. See Save() for details.
-
-        @param a_ostream    String to have the INI data appended to.
-
-        @param a_bAddSignature  Prepend the UTF-8 BOM if the output data is in
-                            UTF-8 format. If it is not UTF-8 then this value is
-                            ignored. Do not set this to true if anything has
-                            already been written to the stream.
-
-        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
-     */
-    SI_Error Save(
-        std::ostream &  a_ostream,
-        bool            a_bAddSignature = false
-        ) const
-    {
-        StreamWriter writer(a_ostream);
-        return Save(writer, a_bAddSignature);
-    }
-#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-
-    /** Append the INI data to a string. See Save() for details.
-
-        @param a_sBuffer    String to have the INI data appended to.
-
-        @param a_bAddSignature  Prepend the UTF-8 BOM if the output data is in
-                            UTF-8 format. If it is not UTF-8 then this value is
-                            ignored. Do not set this to true if anything has
-                            already been written to the string.
-
-        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
-     */
-    SI_Error Save(
-        std::string &   a_sBuffer,
-        bool            a_bAddSignature = false
-        ) const
-    {
-        StringWriter writer(a_sBuffer);
-        return Save(writer, a_bAddSignature);
-    }
-
-    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-    /** @}
-        @{ @name Accessing INI Data */
-
-    /** Retrieve all section names. The list is returned as an STL vector of
-        names and can be iterated or searched as necessary. Note that the
-        sort order of the returned strings is NOT DEFINED. You can sort
-        the names into the load order if desired. Search this file for ".sort"
-        for an example.
-
-        NOTE! This structure contains only pointers to strings. The actual
-        string data is stored in memory owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the
-        CSimpleIni object is not destroyed or Reset() while these pointers
-        are in use!
-
-        @param a_names          Vector that will receive all of the section
-                                 names. See note above!
-     */
-    void GetAllSections(
-        TNamesDepend & a_names
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Retrieve all unique key names in a section. The sort order of the
-        returned strings is NOT DEFINED. You can sort the names into the load 
-        order if desired. Search this file for ".sort" for an example. Only 
-        unique key names are returned.
-
-        NOTE! This structure contains only pointers to strings. The actual
-        string data is stored in memory owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the
-        CSimpleIni object is not destroyed or Reset() while these strings
-        are in use!
-
-        @param a_pSection       Section to request data for
-        @param a_names          List that will receive all of the key
-                                 names. See note above!
-
-        @return true            Section was found.
-        @return false           Matching section was not found.
-     */
-    bool GetAllKeys(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        TNamesDepend &  a_names
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Retrieve all values for a specific key. This method can be used when
-        multiple keys are both enabled and disabled. Note that the sort order 
-        of the returned strings is NOT DEFINED. You can sort the names into 
-        the load order if desired. Search this file for ".sort" for an example.
-
-        NOTE! The returned values are pointers to string data stored in memory
-        owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the CSimpleIni object is not destroyed
-        or Reset while you are using this pointer!
-
-        @param a_pSection       Section to search
-        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
-        @param a_values         List to return if the key is not found
-
-        @return true            Key was found.
-        @return false           Matching section/key was not found.
-     */
-    bool GetAllValues(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        TNamesDepend &  a_values
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Query the number of keys in a specific section. Note that if multiple
-        keys are enabled, then this value may be different to the number of
-        keys returned by GetAllKeys.
-
-        @param a_pSection       Section to request data for
-
-        @return -1              Section does not exist in the file
-        @return >=0             Number of keys in the section
-     */
-    int GetSectionSize(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Retrieve all key and value pairs for a section. The data is returned
-        as a pointer to an STL map and can be iterated or searched as
-        desired. Note that multiple entries for the same key may exist when
-        multiple keys have been enabled.
-
-        NOTE! This structure contains only pointers to strings. The actual
-        string data is stored in memory owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the
-        CSimpleIni object is not destroyed or Reset() while these strings
-        are in use!
-
-        @param a_pSection       Name of the section to return
-        @return boolean         Was a section matching the supplied
-                                name found.
-     */
-    const TKeyVal * GetSection(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Retrieve the value for a specific key. If multiple keys are enabled
-        (see SetMultiKey) then only the first value associated with that key
-        will be returned, see GetAllValues for getting all values with multikey.
-
-        NOTE! The returned value is a pointer to string data stored in memory
-        owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the CSimpleIni object is not destroyed
-        or Reset while you are using this pointer!
-
-        @param a_pSection       Section to search
-        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
-        @param a_pDefault       Value to return if the key is not found
-        @param a_pHasMultiple   Optionally receive notification of if there are
-                                multiple entries for this key.
-
-        @return a_pDefault      Key was not found in the section
-        @return other           Value of the key
-     */
-    const SI_CHAR * GetValue(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pDefault     = NULL,
-        bool *          a_pHasMultiple = NULL
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Retrieve a numeric value for a specific key. If multiple keys are enabled
-        (see SetMultiKey) then only the first value associated with that key
-        will be returned, see GetAllValues for getting all values with multikey.
-
-        @param a_pSection       Section to search
-        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
-        @param a_nDefault       Value to return if the key is not found
-        @param a_pHasMultiple   Optionally receive notification of if there are
-                                multiple entries for this key.
-
-        @return a_nDefault      Key was not found in the section
-        @return other           Value of the key
-     */
-    long GetLongValue(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        long            a_nDefault     = 0,
-        bool *          a_pHasMultiple = NULL
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Retrieve a boolean value for a specific key. If multiple keys are enabled
-        (see SetMultiKey) then only the first value associated with that key
-        will be returned, see GetAllValues for getting all values with multikey.
-
-        Strings starting with "t", "y", "on" or "1" are returned as logically true.
-        Strings starting with "f", "n", "of" or "0" are returned as logically false.
-        For all other values the default is returned. Character comparisons are 
-        case-insensitive.
-
-        @param a_pSection       Section to search
-        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
-        @param a_bDefault       Value to return if the key is not found
-        @param a_pHasMultiple   Optionally receive notification of if there are
-                                multiple entries for this key.
-
-        @return a_nDefault      Key was not found in the section
-        @return other           Value of the key
-     */
-    bool GetBoolValue(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        bool            a_bDefault     = false,
-        bool *          a_pHasMultiple = NULL
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Add or update a section or value. This will always insert
-        when multiple keys are enabled.
-
-        @param a_pSection   Section to add or update
-        @param a_pKey       Key to add or update. Set to NULL to
-                            create an empty section.
-        @param a_pValue     Value to set. Set to NULL to create an
-                            empty section.
-        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the section or the
-                            key. If a_pKey is NULL then it will be associated
-                            with the section, otherwise the key. Note that a
-                            comment may be set ONLY when the section or key is
-                            first created (i.e. when this function returns the
-                            value SI_INSERTED). If you wish to create a section
-                            with a comment then you need to create the section
-                            separately to the key. The comment string must be
-                            in full comment form already (have a comment
-                            character starting every line).
-        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
-                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
-                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
-                            difference between Delete/SetValue and SetValue
-                            with a_bForceReplace = true, is that the load 
-                            order and comment will be preserved this way.
-
-        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
-        @return SI_UPDATED  Value was updated
-        @return SI_INSERTED Value was inserted
-     */
-    SI_Error SetValue(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pValue,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment      = NULL,
-        bool            a_bForceReplace = false
-        )
-    {
-        return AddEntry(a_pSection, a_pKey, a_pValue, a_pComment, a_bForceReplace, true);
-    }
-
-    /** Add or update a numeric value. This will always insert
-        when multiple keys are enabled.
-
-        @param a_pSection   Section to add or update
-        @param a_pKey       Key to add or update. 
-        @param a_nValue     Value to set. 
-        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the key. See the 
-                            notes on SetValue() for comments.
-        @param a_bUseHex    By default the value will be written to the file 
-                            in decimal format. Set this to true to write it 
-                            as hexadecimal.
-        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
-                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
-                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
-                            difference between Delete/SetLongValue and 
-                            SetLongValue with a_bForceReplace = true, is that 
-                            the load order and comment will be preserved this 
-                            way.
-
-        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
-        @return SI_UPDATED  Value was updated
-        @return SI_INSERTED Value was inserted
-     */
-    SI_Error SetLongValue(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        long            a_nValue,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment      = NULL,
-        bool            a_bUseHex       = false,
-        bool            a_bForceReplace = false
-        );
-
-    /** Add or update a boolean value. This will always insert
-        when multiple keys are enabled.
-
-        @param a_pSection   Section to add or update
-        @param a_pKey       Key to add or update. 
-        @param a_bValue     Value to set. 
-        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the key. See the 
-                            notes on SetValue() for comments.
-        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
-                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
-                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
-                            difference between Delete/SetBoolValue and 
-                            SetBoolValue with a_bForceReplace = true, is that 
-                            the load order and comment will be preserved this 
-                            way.
-
-        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
-        @return SI_UPDATED  Value was updated
-        @return SI_INSERTED Value was inserted
-     */
-    SI_Error SetBoolValue(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        bool            a_nValue,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment      = NULL,
-        bool            a_bForceReplace = false
-        );
-
-    /** Delete an entire section, or a key from a section. Note that the
-        data returned by GetSection is invalid and must not be used after
-        anything has been deleted from that section using this method.
-        Note when multiple keys is enabled, this will delete all keys with
-        that name; there is no way to selectively delete individual key/values
-        in this situation.
-
-        @param a_pSection       Section to delete key from, or if
-                                a_pKey is NULL, the section to remove.
-        @param a_pKey           Key to remove from the section. Set to
-                                NULL to remove the entire section.
-        @param a_bRemoveEmpty   If the section is empty after this key has
-                                been deleted, should the empty section be
-                                removed?
-
-        @return true            Key or section was deleted.
-        @return false           Key or section was not found.
-     */
-    bool Delete(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        bool            a_bRemoveEmpty = false
-        );
-
-    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-    /** @}
-        @{ @name Converter */
-
-    /** Return a conversion object to convert text to the same encoding
-        as is used by the Save(), SaveFile() and SaveString() functions.
-        Use this to prepare the strings that you wish to append or prepend
-        to the output INI data.
-     */
-    Converter GetConverter() const {
-        return Converter(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
-    }
-
-    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
-    /** @} */
-
-private:
-    // copying is not permitted
-    CSimpleIniTempl(const CSimpleIniTempl &); // disabled
-    CSimpleIniTempl & operator=(const CSimpleIniTempl &); // disabled
-
-    /** Parse the data looking for a file comment and store it if found.
-    */
-    SI_Error FindFileComment(
-        SI_CHAR *&      a_pData,
-        bool            a_bCopyStrings
-        );
-
-    /** Parse the data looking for the next valid entry. The memory pointed to
-        by a_pData is modified by inserting NULL characters. The pointer is
-        updated to the current location in the block of text.
-    */
-    bool FindEntry(
-        SI_CHAR *&  a_pData,
-        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pKey,
-        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pVal,
-        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pComment
-        ) const;
-
-    /** Add the section/key/value to our data.
-
-        @param a_pSection   Section name. Sections will be created if they
-                            don't already exist.
-        @param a_pKey       Key name. May be NULL to create an empty section.
-                            Existing entries will be updated. New entries will
-                            be created.
-        @param a_pValue     Value for the key.
-        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the section or the
-                            key. If a_pKey is NULL then it will be associated
-                            with the section, otherwise the key. This must be
-                            a string in full comment form already (have a
-                            comment character starting every line).
-        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
-                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
-                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
-                            difference between Delete/AddEntry and AddEntry
-                            with a_bForceReplace = true, is that the load 
-                            order and comment will be preserved this way.
-        @param a_bCopyStrings   Should copies of the strings be made or not.
-                            If false then the pointers will be used as is.
-    */
-    SI_Error AddEntry(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pValue,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
-        bool            a_bForceReplace,
-        bool            a_bCopyStrings
-        );
-
-    /** Is the supplied character a whitespace character? */
-    inline bool IsSpace(SI_CHAR ch) const {
-        return (ch == ' ' || ch == '\t' || ch == '\r' || ch == '\n');
-    }
-
-    /** Does the supplied character start a comment line? */
-    inline bool IsComment(SI_CHAR ch) const {
-        return (ch == ';' || ch == '#');
-    }
-
-
-    /** Skip over a newline character (or characters) for either DOS or UNIX */
-    inline void SkipNewLine(SI_CHAR *& a_pData) const {
-        a_pData += (*a_pData == '\r' && *(a_pData+1) == '\n') ? 2 : 1;
-    }
-
-    /** Make a copy of the supplied string, replacing the original pointer */
-    SI_Error CopyString(const SI_CHAR *& a_pString);
-
-    /** Delete a string from the copied strings buffer if necessary */
-    void DeleteString(const SI_CHAR * a_pString);
-
-    /** Internal use of our string comparison function */
-    bool IsLess(const SI_CHAR * a_pLeft, const SI_CHAR * a_pRight) const {
-        const static SI_STRLESS isLess = SI_STRLESS();
-        return isLess(a_pLeft, a_pRight);
-    }
-
-    bool IsMultiLineTag(const SI_CHAR * a_pData) const;
-    bool IsMultiLineData(const SI_CHAR * a_pData) const;
-    bool LoadMultiLineText(
-        SI_CHAR *&          a_pData,
-        const SI_CHAR *&    a_pVal,
-        const SI_CHAR *     a_pTagName,
-        bool                a_bAllowBlankLinesInComment = false
-        ) const;
-    bool IsNewLineChar(SI_CHAR a_c) const;
-
-    bool OutputMultiLineText(
-        OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
-        Converter &     a_oConverter,
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pText
-        ) const;
-
-private:
-    /** Copy of the INI file data in our character format. This will be
-        modified when parsed to have NULL characters added after all
-        interesting string entries. All of the string pointers to sections,
-        keys and values point into this block of memory.
-     */
-    SI_CHAR * m_pData;
-
-    /** Length of the data that we have stored. Used when deleting strings
-        to determine if the string is stored here or in the allocated string
-        buffer.
-     */
-    size_t m_uDataLen;
-
-    /** File comment for this data, if one exists. */
-    const SI_CHAR * m_pFileComment;
-
-    /** Parsed INI data. Section -> (Key -> Value). */
-    TSection m_data;
-
-    /** This vector stores allocated memory for copies of strings that have
-        been supplied after the file load. It will be empty unless SetValue()
-        has been called.
-     */
-    TNamesDepend m_strings;
-
-    /** Is the format of our datafile UTF-8 or MBCS? */
-    bool m_bStoreIsUtf8;
-
-    /** Are multiple values permitted for the same key? */
-    bool m_bAllowMultiKey;
-
-    /** Are data values permitted to span multiple lines? */
-    bool m_bAllowMultiLine;
-
-    /** Next order value, used to ensure sections and keys are output in the
-        same order that they are loaded/added.
-     */
-    int m_nOrder;
-};
-
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-//                                  IMPLEMENTATION
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-template
-CSimpleIniTempl::CSimpleIniTempl(
-    bool a_bIsUtf8,
-    bool a_bAllowMultiKey,
-    bool a_bAllowMultiLine
-    )
-  : m_pData(0)
-  , m_uDataLen(0)
-  , m_pFileComment(NULL)
-  , m_bStoreIsUtf8(a_bIsUtf8)
-  , m_bAllowMultiKey(a_bAllowMultiKey)
-  , m_bAllowMultiLine(a_bAllowMultiLine)
-  , m_nOrder(0)
-{ }
-
-template
-CSimpleIniTempl::~CSimpleIniTempl()
-{
-    Reset();
-}
-
-template
-void
-CSimpleIniTempl::Reset()
-{
-    // remove all data
-    delete[] m_pData;
-    m_pData = NULL;
-    m_uDataLen = 0;
-    m_pFileComment = NULL;
-    if (!m_data.empty()) {
-        m_data.erase(m_data.begin(), m_data.end());
-    }
-
-    // remove all strings
-    if (!m_strings.empty()) {
-        typename TNamesDepend::iterator i = m_strings.begin();
-        for (; i != m_strings.end(); ++i) {
-            delete[] const_cast(i->pItem);
-        }
-        m_strings.erase(m_strings.begin(), m_strings.end());
-    }
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::LoadFile(
-    const char * a_pszFile
-    )
-{
-    FILE * fp = NULL;
-#if __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__ && !_WIN32_WCE
-    fopen_s(&fp, a_pszFile, "rb");
-#else // !__STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
-    fp = fopen(a_pszFile, "rb");
-#endif // __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
-    if (!fp) {
-        return SI_FILE;
-    }
-    SI_Error rc = LoadFile(fp);
-    fclose(fp);
-    return rc;
-}
-
-#ifdef SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::LoadFile(
-    const SI_WCHAR_T * a_pwszFile
-    )
-{
-#ifdef _WIN32
-    FILE * fp = NULL;
-#if __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__ && !_WIN32_WCE
-    _wfopen_s(&fp, a_pwszFile, L"rb");
-#else // !__STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
-    fp = _wfopen(a_pwszFile, L"rb");
-#endif // __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
-    if (!fp) return SI_FILE;
-    SI_Error rc = LoadFile(fp);
-    fclose(fp);
-    return rc;
-#else // !_WIN32 (therefore SI_CONVERT_ICU)
-    char szFile[256];
-    u_austrncpy(szFile, a_pwszFile, sizeof(szFile));
-    return LoadFile(szFile);
-#endif // _WIN32
-}
-#endif // SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::LoadFile(
-    FILE * a_fpFile
-    )
-{
-    // load the raw file data
-    int retval = fseek(a_fpFile, 0, SEEK_END);
-    if (retval != 0) {
-        return SI_FILE;
-    }
-    long lSize = ftell(a_fpFile);
-    if (lSize < 0) {
-        return SI_FILE;
-    }
-    if (lSize == 0) {
-        return SI_OK;
-    }
-    char * pData = new char[lSize];
-    if (!pData) {
-        return SI_NOMEM;
-    }
-    fseek(a_fpFile, 0, SEEK_SET);
-    size_t uRead = fread(pData, sizeof(char), lSize, a_fpFile);
-    if (uRead != (size_t) lSize) {
-        delete[] pData;
-        return SI_FILE;
-    }
-
-    // convert the raw data to unicode
-    SI_Error rc = Load(pData, uRead);
-    delete[] pData;
-    return rc;
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::Load(
-    const char *    a_pData,
-    size_t          a_uDataLen
-    )
-{
-    SI_CONVERTER converter(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
-
-    if (a_uDataLen == 0) {
-        return SI_OK;
-    }
-
-    // consume the UTF-8 BOM if it exists
-    if (m_bStoreIsUtf8 && a_uDataLen >= 3) {
-        if (memcmp(a_pData, SI_UTF8_SIGNATURE, 3) == 0) {
-            a_pData    += 3;
-            a_uDataLen -= 3;
-        }
-    }
-
-    // determine the length of the converted data
-    size_t uLen = converter.SizeFromStore(a_pData, a_uDataLen);
-    if (uLen == (size_t)(-1)) {
-        return SI_FAIL;
-    }
-
-    // allocate memory for the data, ensure that there is a NULL
-    // terminator wherever the converted data ends
-    SI_CHAR * pData = new SI_CHAR[uLen+1];
-    if (!pData) {
-        return SI_NOMEM;
-    }
-    memset(pData, 0, sizeof(SI_CHAR)*(uLen+1));
-
-    // convert the data
-    if (!converter.ConvertFromStore(a_pData, a_uDataLen, pData, uLen)) {
-        delete[] pData;
-        return SI_FAIL;
-    }
-
-    // parse it
-    const static SI_CHAR empty = 0;
-    SI_CHAR * pWork = pData;
-    const SI_CHAR * pSection = ∅
-    const SI_CHAR * pItem = NULL;
-    const SI_CHAR * pVal = NULL;
-    const SI_CHAR * pComment = NULL;
-
-    // We copy the strings if we are loading data into this class when we
-    // already have stored some.
-    bool bCopyStrings = (m_pData != NULL);
-
-    // find a file comment if it exists, this is a comment that starts at the
-    // beginning of the file and continues until the first blank line.
-    SI_Error rc = FindFileComment(pWork, bCopyStrings);
-    if (rc < 0) return rc;
-
-    // add every entry in the file to the data table
-    while (FindEntry(pWork, pSection, pItem, pVal, pComment)) {
-        rc = AddEntry(pSection, pItem, pVal, pComment, false, bCopyStrings);
-        if (rc < 0) return rc;
-    }
-
-    // store these strings if we didn't copy them
-    if (bCopyStrings) {
-        delete[] pData;
-    }
-    else {
-        m_pData = pData;
-        m_uDataLen = uLen+1;
-    }
-
-    return SI_OK;
-}
-
-#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::Load(
-    std::istream & a_istream
-    )
-{
-    std::string strData;
-    char szBuf[512];
-    do {
-        a_istream.get(szBuf, sizeof(szBuf), '\0');
-        strData.append(szBuf);
-    }
-    while (a_istream.good());
-    return Load(strData);
-}
-#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::FindFileComment(
-    SI_CHAR *&      a_pData,
-    bool            a_bCopyStrings
-    )
-{
-    // there can only be a single file comment
-    if (m_pFileComment) {
-        return SI_OK;
-    }
-
-    // Load the file comment as multi-line text, this will modify all of
-    // the newline characters to be single \n chars
-    if (!LoadMultiLineText(a_pData, m_pFileComment, NULL, false)) {
-        return SI_OK;
-    }
-
-    // copy the string if necessary
-    if (a_bCopyStrings) {
-        SI_Error rc = CopyString(m_pFileComment);
-        if (rc < 0) return rc;
-    }
-
-    return SI_OK;
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::FindEntry(
-    SI_CHAR *&        a_pData,
-    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pKey,
-    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pVal,
-    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pComment
-    ) const
-{
-    a_pComment = NULL;
-
-    SI_CHAR * pTrail = NULL;
-    while (*a_pData) {
-        // skip spaces and empty lines
-        while (*a_pData && IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
-            ++a_pData;
-        }
-        if (!*a_pData) {
-            break;
-        }
-
-        // skip processing of comment lines but keep a pointer to
-        // the start of the comment.
-        if (IsComment(*a_pData)) {
-            LoadMultiLineText(a_pData, a_pComment, NULL, true);
-            continue;
-        }
-
-        // process section names
-        if (*a_pData == '[') {
-            // skip leading spaces
-            ++a_pData;
-            while (*a_pData && IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
-                ++a_pData;
-            }
-
-            // find the end of the section name (it may contain spaces)
-            // and convert it to lowercase as necessary
-            a_pSection = a_pData;
-            while (*a_pData && *a_pData != ']' && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
-                ++a_pData;
-            }
-
-            // if it's an invalid line, just skip it
-            if (*a_pData != ']') {
-                continue;
-            }
-
-            // remove trailing spaces from the section
-            pTrail = a_pData - 1;
-            while (pTrail >= a_pSection && IsSpace(*pTrail)) {
-                --pTrail;
-            }
-            ++pTrail;
-            *pTrail = 0;
-
-            // skip to the end of the line
-            ++a_pData;  // safe as checked that it == ']' above
-            while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
-                ++a_pData;
-            }
-
-            a_pKey = NULL;
-            a_pVal = NULL;
-            return true;
-        }
-
-        // find the end of the key name (it may contain spaces)
-        // and convert it to lowercase as necessary
-        a_pKey = a_pData;
-        while (*a_pData && *a_pData != '=' && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
-            ++a_pData;
-        }
-
-        // if it's an invalid line, just skip it
-        if (*a_pData != '=') {
-            continue;
-        }
-
-        // empty keys are invalid
-        if (a_pKey == a_pData) {
-            while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
-                ++a_pData;
-            }
-            continue;
-        }
-
-        // remove trailing spaces from the key
-        pTrail = a_pData - 1;
-        while (pTrail >= a_pKey && IsSpace(*pTrail)) {
-            --pTrail;
-        }
-        ++pTrail;
-        *pTrail = 0;
-
-        // skip leading whitespace on the value
-        ++a_pData;  // safe as checked that it == '=' above
-        while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData) && IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
-            ++a_pData;
-        }
-
-        // find the end of the value which is the end of this line
-        a_pVal = a_pData;
-        while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
-            ++a_pData;
-        }
-
-        // remove trailing spaces from the value
-        pTrail = a_pData - 1;
-        if (*a_pData) { // prepare for the next round
-            SkipNewLine(a_pData);
-        }
-        while (pTrail >= a_pVal && IsSpace(*pTrail)) {
-            --pTrail;
-        }
-        ++pTrail;
-        *pTrail = 0;
-
-        // check for multi-line entries
-        if (m_bAllowMultiLine && IsMultiLineTag(a_pVal)) {
-            // skip the "<<<" to get the tag that will end the multiline
-            const SI_CHAR * pTagName = a_pVal + 3;
-            return LoadMultiLineText(a_pData, a_pVal, pTagName);
-        }
-
-        // return the standard entry
-        return true;
-    }
-
-    return false;
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::IsMultiLineTag(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pVal
-    ) const
-{
-    // check for the "<<<" prefix for a multi-line entry
-    if (*a_pVal++ != '<') return false;
-    if (*a_pVal++ != '<') return false;
-    if (*a_pVal++ != '<') return false;
-    return true;
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::IsMultiLineData(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pData
-    ) const
-{
-    // data is multi-line if it has any of the following features:
-    //  * whitespace prefix
-    //  * embedded newlines
-    //  * whitespace suffix
-
-    // empty string
-    if (!*a_pData) {
-        return false;
-    }
-
-    // check for prefix
-    if (IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
-        return true;
-    }
-
-    // embedded newlines
-    while (*a_pData) {
-        if (IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
-            return true;
-        }
-        ++a_pData;
-    }
-
-    // check for suffix
-    if (IsSpace(*--a_pData)) {
-        return true;
-    }
-
-    return false;
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::IsNewLineChar(
-    SI_CHAR a_c
-    ) const
-{
-    return (a_c == '\n' || a_c == '\r');
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::LoadMultiLineText(
-    SI_CHAR *&          a_pData,
-    const SI_CHAR *&    a_pVal,
-    const SI_CHAR *     a_pTagName,
-    bool                a_bAllowBlankLinesInComment
-    ) const
-{
-    // we modify this data to strip all newlines down to a single '\n'
-    // character. This means that on Windows we need to strip out some
-    // characters which will make the data shorter.
-    // i.e.  LINE1-LINE1\r\nLINE2-LINE2\0 will become
-    //       LINE1-LINE1\nLINE2-LINE2\0
-    // The pDataLine entry is the pointer to the location in memory that
-    // the current line needs to start to run following the existing one.
-    // This may be the same as pCurrLine in which case no move is needed.
-    SI_CHAR * pDataLine = a_pData;
-    SI_CHAR * pCurrLine;
-
-    // value starts at the current line
-    a_pVal = a_pData;
-
-    // find the end tag. This tag must start in column 1 and be
-    // followed by a newline. No whitespace removal is done while
-    // searching for this tag.
-    SI_CHAR cEndOfLineChar = *a_pData;
-    for(;;) {
-        // if we are loading comments then we need a comment character as
-        // the first character on every line
-        if (!a_pTagName && !IsComment(*a_pData)) {
-            // if we aren't allowing blank lines then we're done
-            if (!a_bAllowBlankLinesInComment) {
-                break;
-            }
-
-            // if we are allowing blank lines then we only include them
-            // in this comment if another comment follows, so read ahead
-            // to find out.
-            SI_CHAR * pCurr = a_pData;
-            int nNewLines = 0;
-            while (IsSpace(*pCurr)) {
-                if (IsNewLineChar(*pCurr)) {
-                    ++nNewLines;
-                    SkipNewLine(pCurr);
-                }
-                else {
-                    ++pCurr;
-                }
-            }
-
-            // we have a comment, add the blank lines to the output
-            // and continue processing from here
-            if (IsComment(*pCurr)) {
-                for (; nNewLines > 0; --nNewLines) *pDataLine++ = '\n';
-                a_pData = pCurr;
-                continue;
-            }
-
-            // the comment ends here
-            break;
-        }
-
-        // find the end of this line
-        pCurrLine = a_pData;
-        while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) ++a_pData;
-
-        // move this line down to the location that it should be if necessary
-        if (pDataLine < pCurrLine) {
-            size_t nLen = (size_t) (a_pData - pCurrLine);
-            memmove(pDataLine, pCurrLine, nLen * sizeof(SI_CHAR));
-            pDataLine[nLen] = '\0';
-        }
-
-        // end the line with a NULL
-        cEndOfLineChar = *a_pData;
-        *a_pData = 0;
-
-        // if are looking for a tag then do the check now. This is done before
-        // checking for end of the data, so that if we have the tag at the end
-        // of the data then the tag is removed correctly.
-        if (a_pTagName &&
-            (!IsLess(pDataLine, a_pTagName) && !IsLess(a_pTagName, pDataLine)))
-        {
-            break;
-        }
-
-        // if we are at the end of the data then we just automatically end
-        // this entry and return the current data.
-        if (!cEndOfLineChar) {
-            return true;
-        }
-
-        // otherwise we need to process this newline to ensure that it consists
-        // of just a single \n character.
-        pDataLine += (a_pData - pCurrLine);
-        *a_pData = cEndOfLineChar;
-        SkipNewLine(a_pData);
-        *pDataLine++ = '\n';
-    }
-
-    // if we didn't find a comment at all then return false
-    if (a_pVal == a_pData) {
-        a_pVal = NULL;
-        return false;
-    }
-
-    // the data (which ends at the end of the last line) needs to be
-    // null-terminated BEFORE before the newline character(s). If the
-    // user wants a new line in the multi-line data then they need to
-    // add an empty line before the tag.
-    *--pDataLine = '\0';
-
-    // if looking for a tag and if we aren't at the end of the data,
-    // then move a_pData to the start of the next line.
-    if (a_pTagName && cEndOfLineChar) {
-        SI_ASSERT(IsNewLineChar(cEndOfLineChar));
-        *a_pData = cEndOfLineChar;
-        SkipNewLine(a_pData);
-    }
-
-    return true;
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::CopyString(
-    const SI_CHAR *& a_pString
-    )
-{
-    size_t uLen = 0;
-    if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(char)) {
-        uLen = strlen((const char *)a_pString);
-    }
-    else if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(wchar_t)) {
-        uLen = wcslen((const wchar_t *)a_pString);
-    }
-    else {
-        for ( ; a_pString[uLen]; ++uLen) /*loop*/ ;
-    }
-    ++uLen; // NULL character
-    SI_CHAR * pCopy = new SI_CHAR[uLen];
-    if (!pCopy) {
-        return SI_NOMEM;
-    }
-    memcpy(pCopy, a_pString, sizeof(SI_CHAR)*uLen);
-    m_strings.push_back(pCopy);
-    a_pString = pCopy;
-    return SI_OK;
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::AddEntry(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pValue,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
-    bool            a_bForceReplace,
-    bool            a_bCopyStrings
-    )
-{
-    SI_Error rc;
-    bool bInserted = false;
-
-    SI_ASSERT(!a_pComment || IsComment(*a_pComment));
-
-    // if we are copying strings then make a copy of the comment now
-    // because we will need it when we add the entry.
-    if (a_bCopyStrings && a_pComment) {
-        rc = CopyString(a_pComment);
-        if (rc < 0) return rc;
-    }
-
-    // create the section entry if necessary
-    typename TSection::iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
-    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
-        // if the section doesn't exist then we need a copy as the
-        // string needs to last beyond the end of this function
-        if (a_bCopyStrings) {
-            rc = CopyString(a_pSection);
-            if (rc < 0) return rc;
-        }
-
-        // only set the comment if this is a section only entry
-        Entry oSection(a_pSection, ++m_nOrder);
-        if (a_pComment && (!a_pKey || !a_pValue)) {
-            oSection.pComment = a_pComment;
-        }
-
-        typename TSection::value_type oEntry(oSection, TKeyVal());
-        typedef typename TSection::iterator SectionIterator;
-        std::pair i = m_data.insert(oEntry);
-        iSection = i.first;
-        bInserted = true;
-    }
-    if (!a_pKey || !a_pValue) {
-        // section only entries are specified with pItem and pVal as NULL
-        return bInserted ? SI_INSERTED : SI_UPDATED;
-    }
-
-    // check for existence of the key
-    TKeyVal & keyval = iSection->second;
-    typename TKeyVal::iterator iKey = keyval.find(a_pKey);
-
-    // remove all existing entries but save the load order and
-    // comment of the first entry
-    int nLoadOrder = ++m_nOrder;
-    if (iKey != keyval.end() && m_bAllowMultiKey && a_bForceReplace) {
-        const SI_CHAR * pComment = NULL;
-        while (iKey != keyval.end() && !IsLess(a_pKey, iKey->first.pItem)) {
-            if (iKey->first.nOrder < nLoadOrder) {
-                nLoadOrder = iKey->first.nOrder;
-                pComment   = iKey->first.pComment;
-            }
-            ++iKey;
-        }
-        if (pComment) {
-            DeleteString(a_pComment);
-            a_pComment = pComment;
-            CopyString(a_pComment);
-        }
-        Delete(a_pSection, a_pKey);
-        iKey = keyval.end();
-    }
-
-    // make string copies if necessary
-    bool bForceCreateNewKey = m_bAllowMultiKey && !a_bForceReplace;
-    if (a_bCopyStrings) {
-        if (bForceCreateNewKey || iKey == keyval.end()) {
-            // if the key doesn't exist then we need a copy as the
-            // string needs to last beyond the end of this function
-            // because we will be inserting the key next
-            rc = CopyString(a_pKey);
-            if (rc < 0) return rc;
-        }
-
-        // we always need a copy of the value
-        rc = CopyString(a_pValue);
-        if (rc < 0) return rc;
-    }
-
-    // create the key entry
-    if (iKey == keyval.end() || bForceCreateNewKey) {
-        Entry oKey(a_pKey, nLoadOrder);
-        if (a_pComment) {
-            oKey.pComment = a_pComment;
-        }
-        typename TKeyVal::value_type oEntry(oKey, NULL);
-        iKey = keyval.insert(oEntry);
-        bInserted = true;
-    }
-    iKey->second = a_pValue;
-    return bInserted ? SI_INSERTED : SI_UPDATED;
-}
-
-template
-const SI_CHAR *
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetValue(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pDefault,
-    bool *          a_pHasMultiple
-    ) const
-{
-    if (a_pHasMultiple) {
-        *a_pHasMultiple = false;
-    }
-    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) {
-        return a_pDefault;
-    }
-    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
-    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
-        return a_pDefault;
-    }
-    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.find(a_pKey);
-    if (iKeyVal == iSection->second.end()) {
-        return a_pDefault;
-    }
-
-    // check for multiple entries with the same key
-    if (m_bAllowMultiKey && a_pHasMultiple) {
-        typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iTemp = iKeyVal;
-        if (++iTemp != iSection->second.end()) {
-            if (!IsLess(a_pKey, iTemp->first.pItem)) {
-                *a_pHasMultiple = true;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-
-    return iKeyVal->second;
-}
-
-template
-long
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetLongValue(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    long            a_nDefault,
-    bool *          a_pHasMultiple
-    ) const
-{
-    // return the default if we don't have a value
-    const SI_CHAR * pszValue = GetValue(a_pSection, a_pKey, NULL, a_pHasMultiple);
-    if (!pszValue || !*pszValue) return a_nDefault;
-
-    // convert to UTF-8/MBCS which for a numeric value will be the same as ASCII
-    char szValue[64] = { 0 };
-    SI_CONVERTER c(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
-    if (!c.ConvertToStore(pszValue, szValue, sizeof(szValue))) {
-        return a_nDefault;
-    }
-
-    // handle the value as hex if prefaced with "0x"
-    long nValue = a_nDefault;
-    char * pszSuffix = szValue;
-    if (szValue[0] == '0' && (szValue[1] == 'x' || szValue[1] == 'X')) {
-    	if (!szValue[2]) return a_nDefault;
-        nValue = strtol(&szValue[2], &pszSuffix, 16);
-    }
-    else {
-        nValue = strtol(szValue, &pszSuffix, 10);
-    }
-
-    // any invalid strings will return the default value
-    if (*pszSuffix) { 
-        return a_nDefault; 
-    }
-
-    return nValue;
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error 
-CSimpleIniTempl::SetLongValue(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    long            a_nValue,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
-    bool            a_bUseHex,
-    bool            a_bForceReplace
-    )
-{
-    // use SetValue to create sections
-    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) return SI_FAIL;
-
-    // convert to an ASCII string
-    char szInput[64];
-    sprintf(szInput, a_bUseHex ? "0x%lx" : "%ld", a_nValue);
-
-    // convert to output text
-    SI_CHAR szOutput[64];
-    SI_CONVERTER c(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
-    c.ConvertFromStore(szInput, strlen(szInput) + 1, 
-        szOutput, sizeof(szOutput) / sizeof(SI_CHAR));
-
-    // actually add it
-    return AddEntry(a_pSection, a_pKey, szOutput, a_pComment, a_bForceReplace, true);
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetBoolValue(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    bool            a_bDefault,
-    bool *          a_pHasMultiple
-    ) const
-{
-    // return the default if we don't have a value
-    const SI_CHAR * pszValue = GetValue(a_pSection, a_pKey, NULL, a_pHasMultiple);
-    if (!pszValue || !*pszValue) return a_bDefault;
-
-    // we only look at the minimum number of characters
-    switch (pszValue[0]) {
-    case 't': case 'T': // true
-    case 'y': case 'Y': // yes
-    case '1':           // 1 (one)
-        return true;
-
-    case 'f': case 'F': // false
-    case 'n': case 'N': // no
-    case '0':           // 0 (zero)
-        return false;
-
-    case 'o': case 'O':
-        if (pszValue[1] == 'n' || pszValue[1] == 'N') return true;  // on
-        if (pszValue[1] == 'f' || pszValue[1] == 'F') return false; // off
-        break;
-    }
-
-    // no recognized value, return the default
-    return a_bDefault;
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error 
-CSimpleIniTempl::SetBoolValue(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    bool            a_bValue,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
-    bool            a_bForceReplace
-    )
-{
-    // use SetValue to create sections
-    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) return SI_FAIL;
-
-    // convert to an ASCII string
-    const char * pszInput = a_bValue ? "true" : "false";
-
-    // convert to output text
-    SI_CHAR szOutput[64];
-    SI_CONVERTER c(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
-    c.ConvertFromStore(pszInput, strlen(pszInput) + 1, 
-        szOutput, sizeof(szOutput) / sizeof(SI_CHAR));
-
-    // actually add it
-    return AddEntry(a_pSection, a_pKey, szOutput, a_pComment, a_bForceReplace, true);
-}
-    
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetAllValues(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    TNamesDepend &  a_values
-    ) const
-{
-    a_values.clear();
-
-    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) {
-        return false;
-    }
-    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
-    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
-        return false;
-    }
-    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.find(a_pKey);
-    if (iKeyVal == iSection->second.end()) {
-        return false;
-    }
-
-    // insert all values for this key
-    a_values.push_back(Entry(iKeyVal->second, iKeyVal->first.pComment, iKeyVal->first.nOrder));
-    if (m_bAllowMultiKey) {
-        ++iKeyVal;
-        while (iKeyVal != iSection->second.end() && !IsLess(a_pKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem)) {
-            a_values.push_back(Entry(iKeyVal->second, iKeyVal->first.pComment, iKeyVal->first.nOrder));
-            ++iKeyVal;
-        }
-    }
-
-    return true;
-}
-
-template
-int
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetSectionSize(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
-    ) const
-{
-    if (!a_pSection) {
-        return -1;
-    }
-
-    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
-    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
-        return -1;
-    }
-    const TKeyVal & section = iSection->second;
-
-    // if multi-key isn't permitted then the section size is
-    // the number of keys that we have.
-    if (!m_bAllowMultiKey || section.empty()) {
-        return (int) section.size();
-    }
-
-    // otherwise we need to count them
-    int nCount = 0;
-    const SI_CHAR * pLastKey = NULL;
-    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = section.begin();
-    for (int n = 0; iKeyVal != section.end(); ++iKeyVal, ++n) {
-        if (!pLastKey || IsLess(pLastKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem)) {
-            ++nCount;
-            pLastKey = iKeyVal->first.pItem;
-        }
-    }
-    return nCount;
-}
-
-template
-const typename CSimpleIniTempl::TKeyVal *
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetSection(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
-    ) const
-{
-    if (a_pSection) {
-        typename TSection::const_iterator i = m_data.find(a_pSection);
-        if (i != m_data.end()) {
-            return &(i->second);
-        }
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-template
-void
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetAllSections(
-    TNamesDepend & a_names
-    ) const
-{
-    a_names.clear();
-    typename TSection::const_iterator i = m_data.begin();
-    for (int n = 0; i != m_data.end(); ++i, ++n ) {
-        a_names.push_back(i->first);
-    }
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::GetAllKeys(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    TNamesDepend &  a_names
-    ) const
-{
-    a_names.clear();
-
-    if (!a_pSection) {
-        return false;
-    }
-
-    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
-    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
-        return false;
-    }
-
-    const TKeyVal & section = iSection->second;
-    const SI_CHAR * pLastKey = NULL;
-    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = section.begin();
-    for (int n = 0; iKeyVal != section.end(); ++iKeyVal, ++n ) {
-        if (!pLastKey || IsLess(pLastKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem)) {
-            a_names.push_back(iKeyVal->first);
-            pLastKey = iKeyVal->first.pItem;
-        }
-    }
-
-    return true;
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::SaveFile(
-    const char *    a_pszFile,
-    bool            a_bAddSignature
-    ) const
-{
-    FILE * fp = NULL;
-#if __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__ && !_WIN32_WCE
-    fopen_s(&fp, a_pszFile, "wb");
-#else // !__STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
-    fp = fopen(a_pszFile, "wb");
-#endif // __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
-    if (!fp) return SI_FILE;
-    SI_Error rc = SaveFile(fp, a_bAddSignature);
-    fclose(fp);
-    return rc;
-}
-
-#ifdef SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::SaveFile(
-    const SI_WCHAR_T *  a_pwszFile,
-    bool                a_bAddSignature
-    ) const
-{
-#ifdef _WIN32
-    FILE * fp = _wfopen(a_pwszFile, L"wb");
-    if (!fp) return SI_FILE;
-    SI_Error rc = SaveFile(fp, a_bAddSignature);
-    fclose(fp);
-    return rc;
-#else // !_WIN32 (therefore SI_CONVERT_ICU)
-    char szFile[256];
-    u_austrncpy(szFile, a_pwszFile, sizeof(szFile));
-    return SaveFile(szFile, a_bAddSignature);
-#endif // _WIN32
-}
-#endif // SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::SaveFile(
-    FILE *  a_pFile,
-    bool    a_bAddSignature
-    ) const
-{
-    FileWriter writer(a_pFile);
-    return Save(writer, a_bAddSignature);
-}
-
-template
-SI_Error
-CSimpleIniTempl::Save(
-    OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
-    bool            a_bAddSignature
-    ) const
-{
-    Converter convert(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
-
-    // add the UTF-8 signature if it is desired
-    if (m_bStoreIsUtf8 && a_bAddSignature) {
-        a_oOutput.Write(SI_UTF8_SIGNATURE);
-    }
-
-    // get all of the sections sorted in load order
-    TNamesDepend oSections;
-    GetAllSections(oSections);
-#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1200
-    oSections.sort();
-#elif defined(__BORLANDC__)
-    oSections.sort(Entry::LoadOrder());
-#else
-    oSections.sort(typename Entry::LoadOrder());
-#endif
-
-    // write the file comment if we have one
-    bool bNeedNewLine = false;
-    if (m_pFileComment) {
-        if (!OutputMultiLineText(a_oOutput, convert, m_pFileComment)) {
-            return SI_FAIL;
-        }
-        bNeedNewLine = true;
-    }
-
-    // iterate through our sections and output the data
-    typename TNamesDepend::const_iterator iSection = oSections.begin();
-    for ( ; iSection != oSections.end(); ++iSection ) {
-        // write out the comment if there is one
-        if (iSection->pComment) {
-            if (bNeedNewLine) {
-                a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-                a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-            }
-            if (!OutputMultiLineText(a_oOutput, convert, iSection->pComment)) {
-                return SI_FAIL;
-            }
-            bNeedNewLine = false;
-        }
-
-        if (bNeedNewLine) {
-            a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-            a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-            bNeedNewLine = false;
-        }
-
-        // write the section (unless there is no section name)
-        if (*iSection->pItem) {
-            if (!convert.ConvertToStore(iSection->pItem)) {
-                return SI_FAIL;
-            }
-            a_oOutput.Write("[");
-            a_oOutput.Write(convert.Data());
-            a_oOutput.Write("]");
-            a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-        }
-
-        // get all of the keys sorted in load order
-        TNamesDepend oKeys;
-        GetAllKeys(iSection->pItem, oKeys);
-#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1200
-        oKeys.sort();
-#elif defined(__BORLANDC__)
-        oKeys.sort(Entry::LoadOrder());
-#else
-        oKeys.sort(typename Entry::LoadOrder());
-#endif
-
-        // write all keys and values
-        typename TNamesDepend::const_iterator iKey = oKeys.begin();
-        for ( ; iKey != oKeys.end(); ++iKey) {
-            // get all values for this key
-            TNamesDepend oValues;
-            GetAllValues(iSection->pItem, iKey->pItem, oValues);
-
-            typename TNamesDepend::const_iterator iValue = oValues.begin();
-            for ( ; iValue != oValues.end(); ++iValue) {
-                // write out the comment if there is one
-                if (iValue->pComment) {
-                    a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-                    if (!OutputMultiLineText(a_oOutput, convert, iValue->pComment)) {
-                        return SI_FAIL;
-                    }
-                }
-
-                // write the key
-                if (!convert.ConvertToStore(iKey->pItem)) {
-                    return SI_FAIL;
-                }
-                a_oOutput.Write(convert.Data());
-
-                // write the value
-                if (!convert.ConvertToStore(iValue->pItem)) {
-                    return SI_FAIL;
-                }
-                a_oOutput.Write(" = ");
-                if (m_bAllowMultiLine && IsMultiLineData(iValue->pItem)) {
-                    // multi-line data needs to be processed specially to ensure
-                    // that we use the correct newline format for the current system
-                    a_oOutput.Write("<<pItem)) {
-                        return SI_FAIL;
-                    }
-                    a_oOutput.Write("SI-END-OF-MULTILINE-TEXT");
-                }
-                else {
-                    a_oOutput.Write(convert.Data());
-                }
-                a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-            }
-        }
-
-        bNeedNewLine = true;
-    }
-
-    return SI_OK;
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::OutputMultiLineText(
-    OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
-    Converter &     a_oConverter,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pText
-    ) const
-{
-    const SI_CHAR * pEndOfLine;
-    SI_CHAR cEndOfLineChar = *a_pText;
-    while (cEndOfLineChar) {
-        // find the end of this line
-        pEndOfLine = a_pText;
-        for (; *pEndOfLine && *pEndOfLine != '\n'; ++pEndOfLine) /*loop*/ ;
-        cEndOfLineChar = *pEndOfLine;
-
-        // temporarily null terminate, convert and output the line
-        *const_cast(pEndOfLine) = 0;
-        if (!a_oConverter.ConvertToStore(a_pText)) {
-            return false;
-        }
-        *const_cast(pEndOfLine) = cEndOfLineChar;
-        a_pText += (pEndOfLine - a_pText) + 1;
-        a_oOutput.Write(a_oConverter.Data());
-        a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
-    }
-    return true;
-}
-
-template
-bool
-CSimpleIniTempl::Delete(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
-    bool            a_bRemoveEmpty
-    )
-{
-    if (!a_pSection) {
-        return false;
-    }
-
-    typename TSection::iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
-    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
-        return false;
-    }
-
-    // remove a single key if we have a keyname
-    if (a_pKey) {
-        typename TKeyVal::iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.find(a_pKey);
-        if (iKeyVal == iSection->second.end()) {
-            return false;
-        }
-
-        // remove any copied strings and then the key
-        typename TKeyVal::iterator iDelete;
-        do {
-            iDelete = iKeyVal++;
-
-            DeleteString(iDelete->first.pItem);
-            DeleteString(iDelete->second);
-            iSection->second.erase(iDelete);
-        }
-        while (iKeyVal != iSection->second.end()
-            && !IsLess(a_pKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem));
-
-        // done now if the section is not empty or we are not pruning away
-        // the empty sections. Otherwise let it fall through into the section
-        // deletion code
-        if (!a_bRemoveEmpty || !iSection->second.empty()) {
-            return true;
-        }
-    }
-    else {
-        // delete all copied strings from this section. The actual
-        // entries will be removed when the section is removed.
-        typename TKeyVal::iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.begin();
-        for ( ; iKeyVal != iSection->second.end(); ++iKeyVal) {
-            DeleteString(iKeyVal->first.pItem);
-            DeleteString(iKeyVal->second);
-        }
-    }
-
-    // delete the section itself
-    DeleteString(iSection->first.pItem);
-    m_data.erase(iSection);
-
-    return true;
-}
-
-template
-void
-CSimpleIniTempl::DeleteString(
-    const SI_CHAR * a_pString
-    )
-{
-    // strings may exist either inside the data block, or they will be
-    // individually allocated and stored in m_strings. We only physically
-    // delete those stored in m_strings.
-    if (a_pString < m_pData || a_pString >= m_pData + m_uDataLen) {
-        typename TNamesDepend::iterator i = m_strings.begin();
-        for (;i != m_strings.end(); ++i) {
-            if (a_pString == i->pItem) {
-                delete[] const_cast(i->pItem);
-                m_strings.erase(i);
-                break;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-//                              CONVERSION FUNCTIONS
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-// Defines the conversion classes for different libraries. Before including
-// SimpleIni.h, set the converter that you wish you use by defining one of the
-// following symbols.
-//
-//  SI_CONVERT_GENERIC      Use the Unicode reference conversion library in
-//                          the accompanying files ConvertUTF.h/c
-//  SI_CONVERT_ICU          Use the IBM ICU conversion library. Requires
-//                          ICU headers on include path and icuuc.lib
-//  SI_CONVERT_WIN32        Use the Win32 API functions for conversion.
-
-#if !defined(SI_CONVERT_GENERIC) && !defined(SI_CONVERT_WIN32) && !defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
-# ifdef _WIN32
-#  define SI_CONVERT_WIN32
-# else
-#  define SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
-# endif
-#endif
-
-/**
- * Generic case-sensitive less than comparison. This class returns numerically
- * ordered ASCII case-sensitive text for all possible sizes and types of
- * SI_CHAR.
- */
-template
-struct SI_GenericCase {
-    bool operator()(const SI_CHAR * pLeft, const SI_CHAR * pRight) const {
-        long cmp;
-        for ( ;*pLeft && *pRight; ++pLeft, ++pRight) {
-            cmp = (long) *pLeft - (long) *pRight;
-            if (cmp != 0) {
-                return cmp < 0;
-            }
-        }
-        return *pRight != 0;
-    }
-};
-
-/**
- * Generic ASCII case-insensitive less than comparison. This class returns
- * numerically ordered ASCII case-insensitive text for all possible sizes
- * and types of SI_CHAR. It is not safe for MBCS text comparison where
- * ASCII A-Z characters are used in the encoding of multi-byte characters.
- */
-template
-struct SI_GenericNoCase {
-    inline SI_CHAR locase(SI_CHAR ch) const {
-        return (ch < 'A' || ch > 'Z') ? ch : (ch - 'A' + 'a');
-    }
-    bool operator()(const SI_CHAR * pLeft, const SI_CHAR * pRight) const {
-        long cmp;
-        for ( ;*pLeft && *pRight; ++pLeft, ++pRight) {
-            cmp = (long) locase(*pLeft) - (long) locase(*pRight);
-            if (cmp != 0) {
-                return cmp < 0;
-            }
-        }
-        return *pRight != 0;
-    }
-};
-
-/**
- * Null conversion class for MBCS/UTF-8 to char (or equivalent).
- */
-template
-class SI_ConvertA {
-    bool m_bStoreIsUtf8;
-protected:
-    SI_ConvertA() { }
-public:
-    SI_ConvertA(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : m_bStoreIsUtf8(a_bStoreIsUtf8) { }
-
-    /* copy and assignment */
-    SI_ConvertA(const SI_ConvertA & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
-    SI_ConvertA & operator=(const SI_ConvertA & rhs) {
-        m_bStoreIsUtf8 = rhs.m_bStoreIsUtf8;
-        return *this;
-    }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of SI_CHAR required for converting the input
-     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @return              Number of SI_CHAR required by the string when
-     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
-     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
-     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
-    {
-        (void)a_pInputData;
-        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
-
-        // ASCII/MBCS/UTF-8 needs no conversion
-        return a_uInputDataLen;
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to SI_CHAR.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
-     *                      converted data.
-     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in SI_CHAR.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
-     *                      converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
-        SI_CHAR *       a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
-    {
-        // ASCII/MBCS/UTF-8 needs no conversion
-        if (a_uInputDataLen > a_uOutputDataSize) {
-            return false;
-        }
-        memcpy(a_pOutputData, a_pInputData, a_uInputDataLen);
-        return true;
-    }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
-     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
-     *                      bytes required to be converted to storage format.
-     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
-     *                      converted to storage format. This size always
-     *                      includes space for the terminating NULL character.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeToStore(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData)
-    {
-        // ASCII/MBCS/UTF-8 needs no conversion
-        return strlen((const char *)a_pInputData) + 1;
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
-     *                      the data will be converted including the
-     *                      terminating NULL character.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
-     *                      string.
-     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
-     *                      terminating NULL character was successfully
-     *                      converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertToStore(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData,
-        char *          a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
-    {
-        // calc input string length (SI_CHAR type and size independent)
-        size_t uInputLen = strlen((const char *)a_pInputData) + 1;
-        if (uInputLen > a_uOutputDataSize) {
-            return false;
-        }
-
-        // ascii/UTF-8 needs no conversion
-        memcpy(a_pOutputData, a_pInputData, uInputLen);
-        return true;
-    }
-};
-
-
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-//                              SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#ifdef SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
-
-#define SI_Case     SI_GenericCase
-#define SI_NoCase   SI_GenericNoCase
-
-#include 
-#include "ConvertUTF.h"
-
-/**
- * Converts UTF-8 to a wchar_t (or equivalent) using the Unicode reference
- * library functions. This can be used on all platforms.
- */
-template
-class SI_ConvertW {
-    bool m_bStoreIsUtf8;
-protected:
-    SI_ConvertW() { }
-public:
-    SI_ConvertW(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : m_bStoreIsUtf8(a_bStoreIsUtf8) { }
-
-    /* copy and assignment */
-    SI_ConvertW(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
-    SI_ConvertW & operator=(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) {
-        m_bStoreIsUtf8 = rhs.m_bStoreIsUtf8;
-        return *this;
-    }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of SI_CHAR required for converting the input
-     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @return              Number of SI_CHAR required by the string when
-     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
-     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
-     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
-    {
-        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
-
-        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
-            // worst case scenario for UTF-8 to wchar_t is 1 char -> 1 wchar_t
-            // so we just return the same number of characters required as for
-            // the source text.
-            return a_uInputDataLen;
-        }
-        else {
-            return mbstowcs(NULL, a_pInputData, a_uInputDataLen);
-        }
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to SI_CHAR.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                       must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                       NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
-     *                       converted data.
-     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in SI_CHAR.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
-     *                       converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
-        SI_CHAR *       a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
-    {
-        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
-            // This uses the Unicode reference implementation to do the
-            // conversion from UTF-8 to wchar_t. The required files are
-            // ConvertUTF.h and ConvertUTF.c which should be included in
-            // the distribution but are publically available from unicode.org
-            // at http://www.unicode.org/Public/PROGRAMS/CVTUTF/
-            ConversionResult retval;
-            const UTF8 * pUtf8 = (const UTF8 *) a_pInputData;
-            if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF32)) {
-                UTF32 * pUtf32 = (UTF32 *) a_pOutputData;
-                retval = ConvertUTF8toUTF32(
-                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uInputDataLen,
-                    &pUtf32, pUtf32 + a_uOutputDataSize,
-                    lenientConversion);
-            }
-            else if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF16)) {
-                UTF16 * pUtf16 = (UTF16 *) a_pOutputData;
-                retval = ConvertUTF8toUTF16(
-                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uInputDataLen,
-                    &pUtf16, pUtf16 + a_uOutputDataSize,
-                    lenientConversion);
-            }
-            return retval == conversionOK;
-        }
-        else {
-            size_t retval = mbstowcs(a_pOutputData,
-                a_pInputData, a_uOutputDataSize);
-            return retval != (size_t)(-1);
-        }
-    }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
-     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
-     *                       bytes required to be converted to storage format.
-     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
-     *                       converted to storage format. This size always
-     *                       includes space for the terminating NULL character.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeToStore(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData)
-    {
-        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
-            // worst case scenario for wchar_t to UTF-8 is 1 wchar_t -> 6 char
-            size_t uLen = 0;
-            while (a_pInputData[uLen]) {
-                ++uLen;
-            }
-            return (6 * uLen) + 1;
-        }
-        else {
-            size_t uLen = wcstombs(NULL, a_pInputData, 0);
-            if (uLen == (size_t)(-1)) {
-                return uLen;
-            }
-            return uLen + 1; // include NULL terminator
-        }
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
-     *                       the data will be converted including the
-     *                       terminating NULL character.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
-     *                       string.
-     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
-     *                       terminating NULL character was successfully
-     *                       converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertToStore(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData,
-        char *          a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize
-        )
-    {
-        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
-            // calc input string length (SI_CHAR type and size independent)
-            size_t uInputLen = 0;
-            while (a_pInputData[uInputLen]) {
-                ++uInputLen;
-            }
-            ++uInputLen; // include the NULL char
-
-            // This uses the Unicode reference implementation to do the
-            // conversion from wchar_t to UTF-8. The required files are
-            // ConvertUTF.h and ConvertUTF.c which should be included in
-            // the distribution but are publically available from unicode.org
-            // at http://www.unicode.org/Public/PROGRAMS/CVTUTF/
-            ConversionResult retval;
-            UTF8 * pUtf8 = (UTF8 *) a_pOutputData;
-            if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF32)) {
-                const UTF32 * pUtf32 = (const UTF32 *) a_pInputData;
-                retval = ConvertUTF32toUTF8(
-                    &pUtf32, pUtf32 + uInputLen,
-                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uOutputDataSize,
-                    lenientConversion);
-            }
-            else if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF16)) {
-                const UTF16 * pUtf16 = (const UTF16 *) a_pInputData;
-                retval = ConvertUTF16toUTF8(
-                    &pUtf16, pUtf16 + uInputLen,
-                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uOutputDataSize,
-                    lenientConversion);
-            }
-            return retval == conversionOK;
-        }
-        else {
-            size_t retval = wcstombs(a_pOutputData,
-                a_pInputData, a_uOutputDataSize);
-            return retval != (size_t) -1;
-        }
-    }
-};
-
-#endif // SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
-
-
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-//                              SI_CONVERT_ICU
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#ifdef SI_CONVERT_ICU
-
-#define SI_Case     SI_GenericCase
-#define SI_NoCase   SI_GenericNoCase
-
-#include 
-
-/**
- * Converts MBCS/UTF-8 to UChar using ICU. This can be used on all platforms.
- */
-template
-class SI_ConvertW {
-    const char * m_pEncoding;
-    UConverter * m_pConverter;
-protected:
-    SI_ConvertW() : m_pEncoding(NULL), m_pConverter(NULL) { }
-public:
-    SI_ConvertW(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : m_pConverter(NULL) {
-        m_pEncoding = a_bStoreIsUtf8 ? "UTF-8" : NULL;
-    }
-
-    /* copy and assignment */
-    SI_ConvertW(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
-    SI_ConvertW & operator=(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) {
-        m_pEncoding = rhs.m_pEncoding;
-        m_pConverter = NULL;
-        return *this;
-    }
-    ~SI_ConvertW() { if (m_pConverter) ucnv_close(m_pConverter); }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of UChar required for converting the input
-     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to UChar.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @return              Number of UChar required by the string when
-     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
-     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
-     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
-    {
-        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
-
-        UErrorCode nError;
-
-        if (!m_pConverter) {
-            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
-            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
-                return (size_t) -1;
-            }
-        }
-
-        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-        ucnv_resetToUnicode(m_pConverter);
-        int32_t nLen = ucnv_toUChars(m_pConverter, NULL, 0,
-            a_pInputData, (int32_t) a_uInputDataLen, &nError);
-        if (nError != U_BUFFER_OVERFLOW_ERROR) {
-            return (size_t) -1;
-        }
-
-        return (size_t) nLen;
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to UChar.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to UChar.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
-     *                      converted data.
-     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in UChar.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
-     *                      converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
-        UChar *         a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
-    {
-        UErrorCode nError;
-
-        if (!m_pConverter) {
-            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
-            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
-                return false;
-            }
-        }
-
-        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-        ucnv_resetToUnicode(m_pConverter);
-        ucnv_toUChars(m_pConverter,
-            a_pOutputData, (int32_t) a_uOutputDataSize,
-            a_pInputData, (int32_t) a_uInputDataLen, &nError);
-        if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
-            return false;
-        }
-
-        return true;
-    }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
-     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
-     *                      bytes required to be converted to storage format.
-     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
-     *                      converted to storage format. This size always
-     *                      includes space for the terminating NULL character.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeToStore(
-        const UChar * a_pInputData)
-    {
-        UErrorCode nError;
-
-        if (!m_pConverter) {
-            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
-            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
-                return (size_t) -1;
-            }
-        }
-
-        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-        ucnv_resetFromUnicode(m_pConverter);
-        int32_t nLen = ucnv_fromUChars(m_pConverter, NULL, 0,
-            a_pInputData, -1, &nError);
-        if (nError != U_BUFFER_OVERFLOW_ERROR) {
-            return (size_t) -1;
-        }
-
-        return (size_t) nLen + 1;
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
-     *                      the data will be converted including the
-     *                      terminating NULL character.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
-     *                      string.
-     * @param a_pOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
-     *                      terminating NULL character was successfully
-     *                      converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertToStore(
-        const UChar *   a_pInputData,
-        char *          a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
-    {
-        UErrorCode nError;
-
-        if (!m_pConverter) {
-            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
-            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
-                return false;
-            }
-        }
-
-        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
-        ucnv_resetFromUnicode(m_pConverter);
-        ucnv_fromUChars(m_pConverter,
-            a_pOutputData, (int32_t) a_uOutputDataSize,
-            a_pInputData, -1, &nError);
-        if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
-            return false;
-        }
-
-        return true;
-    }
-};
-
-#endif // SI_CONVERT_ICU
-
-
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-//                              SI_CONVERT_WIN32
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#ifdef SI_CONVERT_WIN32
-
-#define SI_Case     SI_GenericCase
-
-// Windows CE doesn't have errno or MBCS libraries
-#ifdef _WIN32_WCE
-# ifndef SI_NO_MBCS
-#  define SI_NO_MBCS
-# endif
-#endif
-
-#include 
-#ifdef SI_NO_MBCS
-# define SI_NoCase   SI_GenericNoCase
-#else // !SI_NO_MBCS
-/**
- * Case-insensitive comparison class using Win32 MBCS functions. This class
- * returns a case-insensitive semi-collation order for MBCS text. It may not
- * be safe for UTF-8 text returned in char format as we don't know what
- * characters will be folded by the function! Therefore, if you are using
- * SI_CHAR == char and SetUnicode(true), then you need to use the generic
- * SI_NoCase class instead.
- */
-#include 
-template
-struct SI_NoCase {
-    bool operator()(const SI_CHAR * pLeft, const SI_CHAR * pRight) const {
-        if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(char)) {
-            return _mbsicmp((const unsigned char *)pLeft,
-                (const unsigned char *)pRight) < 0;
-        }
-        if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(wchar_t)) {
-            return _wcsicmp((const wchar_t *)pLeft,
-                (const wchar_t *)pRight) < 0;
-        }
-        return SI_GenericNoCase()(pLeft, pRight);
-    }
-};
-#endif // SI_NO_MBCS
-
-/**
- * Converts MBCS and UTF-8 to a wchar_t (or equivalent) on Windows. This uses
- * only the Win32 functions and doesn't require the external Unicode UTF-8
- * conversion library. It will not work on Windows 95 without using Microsoft
- * Layer for Unicode in your application.
- */
-template
-class SI_ConvertW {
-    UINT m_uCodePage;
-protected:
-    SI_ConvertW() { }
-public:
-    SI_ConvertW(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) {
-        m_uCodePage = a_bStoreIsUtf8 ? CP_UTF8 : CP_ACP;
-    }
-
-    /* copy and assignment */
-    SI_ConvertW(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
-    SI_ConvertW & operator=(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) {
-        m_uCodePage = rhs.m_uCodePage;
-        return *this;
-    }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of SI_CHAR required for converting the input
-     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @return              Number of SI_CHAR required by the string when
-     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
-     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
-     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
-    {
-        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
-
-        int retval = MultiByteToWideChar(
-            m_uCodePage, 0,
-            a_pInputData, (int) a_uInputDataLen,
-            0, 0);
-        return (size_t)(retval > 0 ? retval : -1);
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to SI_CHAR.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
-     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
-     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
-     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
-     *                      converted data.
-     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in SI_CHAR.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
-     *                      converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertFromStore(
-        const char *    a_pInputData,
-        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
-        SI_CHAR *       a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
-    {
-        int nSize = MultiByteToWideChar(
-            m_uCodePage, 0,
-            a_pInputData, (int) a_uInputDataLen,
-            (wchar_t *) a_pOutputData, (int) a_uOutputDataSize);
-        return (nSize > 0);
-    }
-
-    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
-     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
-     *                      bytes required to be converted to storage format.
-     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
-     *                      converted to storage format. This size always
-     *                      includes space for the terminating NULL character.
-     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
-     */
-    size_t SizeToStore(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData)
-    {
-        int retval = WideCharToMultiByte(
-            m_uCodePage, 0,
-            (const wchar_t *) a_pInputData, -1,
-            0, 0, 0, 0);
-        return (size_t) (retval > 0 ? retval : -1);
-    }
-
-    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
-     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
-     *
-     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
-     *                      the data will be converted including the
-     *                      terminating NULL character.
-     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
-     *                      string.
-     * @param a_pOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
-     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
-     *                      terminating NULL character was successfully
-     *                      converted.
-     */
-    bool ConvertToStore(
-        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData,
-        char *          a_pOutputData,
-        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
-    {
-        int retval = WideCharToMultiByte(
-            m_uCodePage, 0,
-            (const wchar_t *) a_pInputData, -1,
-            a_pOutputData, (int) a_uOutputDataSize, 0, 0);
-        return retval > 0;
-    }
-};
-
-#endif // SI_CONVERT_WIN32
-
-
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-//                                  TYPE DEFINITIONS
-// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertA >                 CSimpleIniA;
-typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertA >                   CSimpleIniCaseA;
-
-#if defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
-typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >               CSimpleIniW;
-typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >                 CSimpleIniCaseW;
-#else
-typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >           CSimpleIniW;
-typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >             CSimpleIniCaseW;
-#endif
-
-#ifdef _UNICODE
-# define CSimpleIni      CSimpleIniW
-# define CSimpleIniCase  CSimpleIniCaseW
-# define SI_NEWLINE      SI_NEWLINE_W
-#else // !_UNICODE
-# define CSimpleIni      CSimpleIniA
-# define CSimpleIniCase  CSimpleIniCaseA
-# define SI_NEWLINE      SI_NEWLINE_A
-#endif // _UNICODE
-
-#ifdef _MSC_VER
-# pragma warning (pop)
-#endif
-
-#endif // INCLUDED_SimpleIni_h
-
+/** @mainpage
+
+    
+        
Library     SimpleIni
+        
File        SimpleIni.h
+        
Author      Brodie Thiesfield [code at jellycan dot com]
+        
Source      http://code.jellycan.com/simpleini/
+        
Version     4.11
+    

+
+    Jump to the @link CSimpleIniTempl CSimpleIni @endlink interface documentation.
+
+    @section intro INTRODUCTION
+
+    This component allows an INI-style configuration file to be used on both
+    Windows and Linux/Unix. It is fast, simple and source code using this
+    component will compile unchanged on either OS.
+
+
+    @section features FEATURES
+
+    - MIT Licence allows free use in all software (including GPL and commercial)
+    - multi-platform (Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2K/XP/2003, Windows CE, Linux, Unix)
+    - loading and saving of INI-style configuration files
+    - configuration files can have any newline format on all platforms
+    - liberal acceptance of file format
+        - key/values with no section
+        - removal of whitespace around sections, keys and values
+    - support for multi-line values (values with embedded newline characters)
+    - optional support for multiple keys with the same name
+    - optional case-insensitive sections and keys (for ASCII characters only)
+    - saves files with sections and keys in the same order as they were loaded
+    - preserves comments on the file, section and keys where possible.
+    - supports both char or wchar_t programming interfaces
+    - supports both MBCS (system locale) and UTF-8 file encodings
+    - system locale does not need to be UTF-8 on Linux/Unix to load UTF-8 file
+    - support for non-ASCII characters in section, keys, values and comments
+    - support for non-standard character types or file encodings
+      via user-written converter classes
+    - support for adding/modifying values programmatically
+    - compiles cleanly in the following compilers:
+        - Windows/VC6 (warning level 3)
+        - Windows/VC.NET 2003 (warning level 4)
+        - Windows/VC 2005 (warning level 4)
+        - Linux/gcc (-Wall)
+
+
+    @section usage USAGE SUMMARY
+
+    -#  Define the appropriate symbol for the converter you wish to use and
+        include the SimpleIni.h header file. If no specific converter is defined
+        then the default converter is used. The default conversion mode uses
+        SI_CONVERT_WIN32 on Windows and SI_CONVERT_GENERIC on all other
+        platforms. If you are using ICU then SI_CONVERT_ICU is supported on all
+        platforms.
+    -#  Declare an instance the appropriate class. Note that the following
+        definitions are just shortcuts for commonly used types. Other types
+        (PRUnichar, unsigned short, unsigned char) are also possible.
+        
+            
Interface   Case-sensitive  Load UTF-8  Load MBCS   Typedef
+        
SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
+            
char        No              Yes         Yes #1      CSimpleIniA
+            
char        Yes             Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniCaseA
+            
wchar_t     No              Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniW
+            
wchar_t     Yes             Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniCaseW
+        
SI_CONVERT_WIN32
+            
char        No              No #2       Yes         CSimpleIniA
+            
char        Yes             Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniCaseA
+            
wchar_t     No              Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniW
+            
wchar_t     Yes             Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniCaseW
+        
SI_CONVERT_ICU
+            
char        No              Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniA
+            
char        Yes             Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniCaseA
+            
UChar       No              Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniW
+            
UChar       Yes             Yes         Yes         CSimpleIniCaseW
+        

+        #1  On Windows you are better to use CSimpleIniA with SI_CONVERT_WIN32.

+        #2  Only affects Windows. On Windows this uses MBCS functions and
+            so may fold case incorrectly leading to uncertain results.
+    -# Call Load() or LoadFile() to load and parse the INI configuration file
+    -# Access and modify the data of the file using the following functions
+        
+            
GetAllSections  Return all section names
+            
GetAllKeys      Return all key names within a section
+            
GetAllValues    Return all values within a section & key
+            
GetSection      Return all key names and values in a section
+            
GetSectionSize  Return the number of keys in a section
+            
GetValue        Return a value for a section & key
+            
SetValue        Add or update a value for a section & key
+            
Delete          Remove a section, or a key from a section
+        

+    -# Call Save() or SaveFile() to save the INI configuration data
+
+    @section iostreams IO STREAMS
+
+    SimpleIni supports reading from and writing to STL IO streams. Enable this
+    by defining SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS before including the SimpleIni.h header
+    file. Ensure that if the streams are backed by a file (e.g. ifstream or
+    ofstream) then the flag ios_base::binary has been used when the file was
+    opened.
+
+    @section multiline MULTI-LINE VALUES
+
+    Values that span multiple lines are created using the following format.
+
+        
+        key = <<
+
+    Note the following:
+    - The text used for ENDTAG can be anything and is used to find
+      where the multi-line text ends.
+    - The newline after ENDTAG in the start tag, and the newline
+      before ENDTAG in the end tag is not included in the data value.
+    - The ending tag must be on it's own line with no whitespace before
+      or after it.
+    - The multi-line value is modified at load so that each line in the value
+      is delimited by a single '\\n' character on all platforms. At save time
+      it will be converted into the newline format used by the current
+      platform.
+
+    @section comments COMMENTS
+
+    Comments are preserved in the file within the following restrictions:
+    - Every file may have a single "file comment". It must start with the
+      first character in the file, and will end with the first non-comment
+      line in the file.
+    - Every section may have a single "section comment". It will start
+      with the first comment line following the file comment, or the last
+      data entry. It ends at the beginning of the section.
+    - Every key may have a single "key comment". This comment will start
+      with the first comment line following the section start, or the file
+      comment if there is no section name.
+    - Comments are set at the time that the file, section or key is first
+      created. The only way to modify a comment on a section or a key is to
+      delete that entry and recreate it with the new comment. There is no
+      way to change the file comment.
+
+    @section save SAVE ORDER
+
+    The sections and keys are written out in the same order as they were
+    read in from the file. Sections and keys added to the data after the
+    file has been loaded will be added to the end of the file when it is
+    written. There is no way to specify the location of a section or key
+    other than in first-created, first-saved order.
+
+    @section notes NOTES
+
+    - To load UTF-8 data on Windows 95, you need to use Microsoft Layer for
+      Unicode, or SI_CONVERT_GENERIC, or SI_CONVERT_ICU.
+    - When using SI_CONVERT_GENERIC, ConvertUTF.c must be compiled and linked.
+    - When using SI_CONVERT_ICU, ICU header files must be on the include
+      path and icuuc.lib must be linked in.
+    - To load a UTF-8 file on Windows AND expose it with SI_CHAR == char,
+      you should use SI_CONVERT_GENERIC.
+    - The collation (sorting) order used for sections and keys returned from
+      iterators is NOT DEFINED. If collation order of the text is important
+      then it should be done yourself by either supplying a replacement
+      SI_STRLESS class, or by sorting the strings external to this library.
+    - Usage of the  header on Windows can be disabled by defining
+      SI_NO_MBCS. This is defined automatically on Windows CE platforms.
+
+
+    @section licence MIT LICENCE
+
+    The licence text below is the boilerplate "MIT Licence" used from:
+    http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php
+
+    Copyright (c) 2006-2008, Brodie Thiesfield
+
+    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
+    of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
+    in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
+    to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
+    copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished
+    to do so, subject to the following conditions:
+
+    The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
+    all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+
+    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+    IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
+    FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
+    COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
+    IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
+    CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+*/
+
+#ifndef INCLUDED_SimpleIni_h
+#define INCLUDED_SimpleIni_h
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && (_MSC_VER >= 1020)
+# pragma once
+#endif
+
+// Disable these warnings in MSVC:
+//  4127 "conditional expression is constant" as the conversion classes trigger
+//  it with the statement if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(char)). This test will
+//  be optimized away in a release build.
+//  4503 'insert' : decorated name length exceeded, name was truncated
+//  4702 "unreachable code" as the MS STL header causes it in release mode.
+//  Again, the code causing the warning will be cleaned up by the compiler.
+//  4786 "identifier truncated to 256 characters" as this is thrown hundreds
+//  of times VC6 as soon as STL is used.
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+# pragma warning (push)
+# pragma warning (disable: 4127 4503 4702 4786)
+#endif
+
+#include 
+#include 
+#include 
+#include 
+#include 
+#include 
+
+#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+# include 
+#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+
+#ifdef _DEBUG
+# ifndef assert
+#  include 
+# endif
+# define SI_ASSERT(x)   assert(x)
+#else
+# define SI_ASSERT(x)
+#endif
+
+enum SI_Error {
+    SI_OK       =  0,   //!< No error
+    SI_UPDATED  =  1,   //!< An existing value was updated
+    SI_INSERTED =  2,   //!< A new value was inserted
+
+    // note: test for any error with (retval < 0)
+    SI_FAIL     = -1,   //!< Generic failure
+    SI_NOMEM    = -2,   //!< Out of memory error
+    SI_FILE     = -3    //!< File error (see errno for detail error)
+};
+
+#define SI_UTF8_SIGNATURE     "\xEF\xBB\xBF"
+
+#ifdef _WIN32
+# define SI_NEWLINE_A   "\r\n"
+# define SI_NEWLINE_W   L"\r\n"
+#else // !_WIN32
+# define SI_NEWLINE_A   "\n"
+# define SI_NEWLINE_W   L"\n"
+#endif // _WIN32
+
+#if defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
+# include 
+#endif
+
+#if defined(_WIN32)
+# define SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
+# define SI_WCHAR_T     wchar_t
+#elif defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
+# define SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
+# define SI_WCHAR_T     UChar
+#endif
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//                              MAIN TEMPLATE CLASS
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/** Simple INI file reader.
+
+    This can be instantiated with the choice of unicode or native characterset,
+    and case sensitive or insensitive comparisons of section and key names.
+    The supported combinations are pre-defined with the following typedefs:
+
+    
+        
Interface   Case-sensitive  Typedef
+        
char        No              CSimpleIniA
+        
char        Yes             CSimpleIniCaseA
+        
wchar_t     No              CSimpleIniW
+        
wchar_t     Yes             CSimpleIniCaseW
+    

+
+    Note that using other types for the SI_CHAR is supported. For instance,
+    unsigned char, unsigned short, etc. Note that where the alternative type
+    is a different size to char/wchar_t you may need to supply new helper
+    classes for SI_STRLESS and SI_CONVERTER.
+ */
+template
+class CSimpleIniTempl
+{
+public:
+    /** key entry */
+    struct Entry {
+        const SI_CHAR * pItem;
+        const SI_CHAR * pComment;
+        int             nOrder;
+
+        Entry(const SI_CHAR * a_pszItem = NULL, int a_nOrder = 0)
+            : pItem(a_pszItem)
+            , pComment(NULL)
+            , nOrder(a_nOrder)
+        { }
+        Entry(const SI_CHAR * a_pszItem, const SI_CHAR * a_pszComment, int a_nOrder)
+            : pItem(a_pszItem)
+            , pComment(a_pszComment)
+            , nOrder(a_nOrder)
+        { }
+        Entry(const Entry & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
+        Entry & operator=(const Entry & rhs) {
+            pItem    = rhs.pItem;
+            pComment = rhs.pComment;
+            nOrder   = rhs.nOrder;
+            return *this;
+        }
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1200
+        /** STL of VC6 doesn't allow me to specify my own comparator for list::sort() */
+        bool operator<(const Entry & rhs) const { return LoadOrder()(*this, rhs); }
+        bool operator>(const Entry & rhs) const { return LoadOrder()(rhs, *this); }
+#endif
+
+        /** Strict less ordering by name of key only */
+        struct KeyOrder : std::binary_function {
+            bool operator()(const Entry & lhs, const Entry & rhs) const {
+                const static SI_STRLESS isLess = SI_STRLESS();
+                return isLess(lhs.pItem, rhs.pItem);
+            }
+        };
+
+        /** Strict less ordering by order, and then name of key */
+        struct LoadOrder : std::binary_function {
+            bool operator()(const Entry & lhs, const Entry & rhs) const {
+                if (lhs.nOrder != rhs.nOrder) {
+                    return lhs.nOrder < rhs.nOrder;
+                }
+                return KeyOrder()(lhs.pItem, rhs.pItem);
+            }
+        };
+    };
+
+    /** map keys to values */
+    typedef std::multimap TKeyVal;
+
+    /** map sections to key/value map */
+    typedef std::map TSection;
+
+    /** set of dependent string pointers. Note that these pointers are
+        dependent on memory owned by CSimpleIni.
+    */
+    typedef std::list TNamesDepend;
+
+    /** interface definition for the OutputWriter object to pass to Save()
+        in order to output the INI file data.
+    */
+    class OutputWriter {
+    public:
+        OutputWriter() { }
+        virtual ~OutputWriter() { }
+        virtual void Write(const char * a_pBuf) = 0;
+    private:
+        OutputWriter(const OutputWriter &);             // disable
+        OutputWriter & operator=(const OutputWriter &); // disable
+    };
+
+    /** OutputWriter class to write the INI data to a file */
+    class FileWriter : public OutputWriter {
+        FILE * m_file;
+    public:
+        FileWriter(FILE * a_file) : m_file(a_file) { }
+        void Write(const char * a_pBuf) {
+            fputs(a_pBuf, m_file);
+        }
+    private:
+        FileWriter(const FileWriter &);             // disable
+        FileWriter & operator=(const FileWriter &); // disable
+    };
+
+    /** OutputWriter class to write the INI data to a string */
+    class StringWriter : public OutputWriter {
+        std::string & m_string;
+    public:
+        StringWriter(std::string & a_string) : m_string(a_string) { }
+        void Write(const char * a_pBuf) {
+            m_string.append(a_pBuf);
+        }
+    private:
+        StringWriter(const StringWriter &);             // disable
+        StringWriter & operator=(const StringWriter &); // disable
+    };
+
+#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+    /** OutputWriter class to write the INI data to an ostream */
+    class StreamWriter : public OutputWriter {
+        std::ostream & m_ostream;
+    public:
+        StreamWriter(std::ostream & a_ostream) : m_ostream(a_ostream) { }
+        void Write(const char * a_pBuf) {
+            m_ostream << a_pBuf;
+        }
+    private:
+        StreamWriter(const StreamWriter &);             // disable
+        StreamWriter & operator=(const StreamWriter &); // disable
+    };
+#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+
+    /** Characterset conversion utility class to convert strings to the
+        same format as is used for the storage.
+    */
+    class Converter : private SI_CONVERTER {
+    public:
+        Converter(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : SI_CONVERTER(a_bStoreIsUtf8) {
+            m_scratch.resize(1024);
+        }
+        Converter(const Converter & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
+        Converter & operator=(const Converter & rhs) {
+            m_scratch = rhs.m_scratch;
+            return *this;
+        }
+        bool ConvertToStore(const SI_CHAR * a_pszString) {
+            size_t uLen = SizeToStore(a_pszString);
+            if (uLen == (size_t)(-1)) {
+                return false;
+            }
+            while (uLen > m_scratch.size()) {
+                m_scratch.resize(m_scratch.size() * 2);
+            }
+            return SI_CONVERTER::ConvertToStore(
+                a_pszString,
+                const_cast(m_scratch.data()),
+                m_scratch.size());
+        }
+        const char * Data() { return m_scratch.data(); }
+    private:
+        std::string m_scratch;
+    };
+
+public:
+    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+    /** Default constructor.
+
+        @param a_bIsUtf8     See the method SetUnicode() for details.
+        @param a_bMultiKey   See the method SetMultiKey() for details.
+        @param a_bMultiLine  See the method SetMultiLine() for details.
+     */
+    CSimpleIniTempl(
+        bool a_bIsUtf8 = false,
+        bool a_bMultiKey = false,
+        bool a_bMultiLine = false
+        );
+
+    /** Destructor */
+    ~CSimpleIniTempl();
+
+    /** Deallocate all memory stored by this object */
+    void Reset();
+
+    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+    /** @{ @name Settings */
+
+    /** Set the storage format of the INI data. This affects both the loading
+        and saving of the INI data using all of the Load/Save API functions.
+        This value cannot be changed after any INI data has been loaded.
+
+        If the file is not set to Unicode (UTF-8), then the data encoding is
+        assumed to be the OS native encoding. This encoding is the system
+        locale on Linux/Unix and the legacy MBCS encoding on Windows NT/2K/XP.
+        If the storage format is set to Unicode then the file will be loaded
+        as UTF-8 encoded data regardless of the native file encoding. If
+        SI_CHAR == char then all of the char* parameters take and return UTF-8
+        encoded data regardless of the system locale.
+
+        \param a_bIsUtf8     Assume UTF-8 encoding for the source?
+     */
+    void SetUnicode(bool a_bIsUtf8 = true) {
+        if (!m_pData) m_bStoreIsUtf8 = a_bIsUtf8;
+    }
+
+    /** Get the storage format of the INI data. */
+    bool IsUnicode() const { return m_bStoreIsUtf8; }
+
+    /** Should multiple identical keys be permitted in the file. If set to false
+        then the last value encountered will be used as the value of the key.
+        If set to true, then all values will be available to be queried. For
+        example, with the following input:
+
+        
+        [section]
+        test=value1
+        test=value2
+        

+
+        Then with SetMultiKey(true), both of the values "value1" and "value2"
+        will be returned for the key test. If SetMultiKey(false) is used, then
+        the value for "test" will only be "value2". This value may be changed
+        at any time.
+
+        \param a_bAllowMultiKey  Allow multi-keys in the source?
+     */
+    void SetMultiKey(bool a_bAllowMultiKey = true) {
+        m_bAllowMultiKey = a_bAllowMultiKey;
+    }
+
+    /** Get the storage format of the INI data. */
+    bool IsMultiKey() const { return m_bAllowMultiKey; }
+
+    /** Should data values be permitted to span multiple lines in the file. If
+        set to false then the multi-line construct <<
+            SI_CHAR     FORMAT
+            char        same format as when loaded (MBCS or UTF-8)
+            wchar_t     UTF-8
+            other       UTF-8
+        
+
+        Note that comments from the original data is preserved as per the
+        documentation on comments. The order of the sections and values
+        from the original file will be preserved.
+
+        Any data prepended or appended to the output device must use the the
+        same format (MBCS or UTF-8). You may use the GetConverter() method to
+        convert text to the correct format regardless of the output format
+        being used by SimpleIni.
+
+        To add a BOM to UTF-8 data, write it out manually at the very beginning
+        like is done in SaveFile when a_bUseBOM is true.
+
+        @param a_oOutput    Output writer to write the data to.
+
+        @param a_bAddSignature  Prepend the UTF-8 BOM if the output data is in
+                            UTF-8 format. If it is not UTF-8 then this value is
+                            ignored. Do not set this to true if anything has
+                            already been written to the OutputWriter.
+
+        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
+     */
+    SI_Error Save(
+        OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
+        bool            a_bAddSignature = false
+        ) const;
+
+#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+    /** Save the INI data to an ostream. See Save() for details.
+
+        @param a_ostream    String to have the INI data appended to.
+
+        @param a_bAddSignature  Prepend the UTF-8 BOM if the output data is in
+                            UTF-8 format. If it is not UTF-8 then this value is
+                            ignored. Do not set this to true if anything has
+                            already been written to the stream.
+
+        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
+     */
+    SI_Error Save(
+        std::ostream &  a_ostream,
+        bool            a_bAddSignature = false
+        ) const
+    {
+        StreamWriter writer(a_ostream);
+        return Save(writer, a_bAddSignature);
+    }
+#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+
+    /** Append the INI data to a string. See Save() for details.
+
+        @param a_sBuffer    String to have the INI data appended to.
+
+        @param a_bAddSignature  Prepend the UTF-8 BOM if the output data is in
+                            UTF-8 format. If it is not UTF-8 then this value is
+                            ignored. Do not set this to true if anything has
+                            already been written to the string.
+
+        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
+     */
+    SI_Error Save(
+        std::string &   a_sBuffer,
+        bool            a_bAddSignature = false
+        ) const
+    {
+        StringWriter writer(a_sBuffer);
+        return Save(writer, a_bAddSignature);
+    }
+
+    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+    /** @}
+        @{ @name Accessing INI Data */
+
+    /** Retrieve all section names. The list is returned as an STL vector of
+        names and can be iterated or searched as necessary. Note that the
+        sort order of the returned strings is NOT DEFINED. You can sort
+        the names into the load order if desired. Search this file for ".sort"
+        for an example.
+
+        NOTE! This structure contains only pointers to strings. The actual
+        string data is stored in memory owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the
+        CSimpleIni object is not destroyed or Reset() while these pointers
+        are in use!
+
+        @param a_names          Vector that will receive all of the section
+                                 names. See note above!
+     */
+    void GetAllSections(
+        TNamesDepend & a_names
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Retrieve all unique key names in a section. The sort order of the
+        returned strings is NOT DEFINED. You can sort the names into the load 
+        order if desired. Search this file for ".sort" for an example. Only 
+        unique key names are returned.
+
+        NOTE! This structure contains only pointers to strings. The actual
+        string data is stored in memory owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the
+        CSimpleIni object is not destroyed or Reset() while these strings
+        are in use!
+
+        @param a_pSection       Section to request data for
+        @param a_names          List that will receive all of the key
+                                 names. See note above!
+
+        @return true            Section was found.
+        @return false           Matching section was not found.
+     */
+    bool GetAllKeys(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        TNamesDepend &  a_names
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Retrieve all values for a specific key. This method can be used when
+        multiple keys are both enabled and disabled. Note that the sort order 
+        of the returned strings is NOT DEFINED. You can sort the names into 
+        the load order if desired. Search this file for ".sort" for an example.
+
+        NOTE! The returned values are pointers to string data stored in memory
+        owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the CSimpleIni object is not destroyed
+        or Reset while you are using this pointer!
+
+        @param a_pSection       Section to search
+        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
+        @param a_values         List to return if the key is not found
+
+        @return true            Key was found.
+        @return false           Matching section/key was not found.
+     */
+    bool GetAllValues(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        TNamesDepend &  a_values
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Query the number of keys in a specific section. Note that if multiple
+        keys are enabled, then this value may be different to the number of
+        keys returned by GetAllKeys.
+
+        @param a_pSection       Section to request data for
+
+        @return -1              Section does not exist in the file
+        @return >=0             Number of keys in the section
+     */
+    int GetSectionSize(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Retrieve all key and value pairs for a section. The data is returned
+        as a pointer to an STL map and can be iterated or searched as
+        desired. Note that multiple entries for the same key may exist when
+        multiple keys have been enabled.
+
+        NOTE! This structure contains only pointers to strings. The actual
+        string data is stored in memory owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the
+        CSimpleIni object is not destroyed or Reset() while these strings
+        are in use!
+
+        @param a_pSection       Name of the section to return
+        @return boolean         Was a section matching the supplied
+                                name found.
+     */
+    const TKeyVal * GetSection(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Retrieve the value for a specific key. If multiple keys are enabled
+        (see SetMultiKey) then only the first value associated with that key
+        will be returned, see GetAllValues for getting all values with multikey.
+
+        NOTE! The returned value is a pointer to string data stored in memory
+        owned by CSimpleIni. Ensure that the CSimpleIni object is not destroyed
+        or Reset while you are using this pointer!
+
+        @param a_pSection       Section to search
+        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
+        @param a_pDefault       Value to return if the key is not found
+        @param a_pHasMultiple   Optionally receive notification of if there are
+                                multiple entries for this key.
+
+        @return a_pDefault      Key was not found in the section
+        @return other           Value of the key
+     */
+    const SI_CHAR * GetValue(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pDefault     = NULL,
+        bool *          a_pHasMultiple = NULL
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Retrieve a numeric value for a specific key. If multiple keys are enabled
+        (see SetMultiKey) then only the first value associated with that key
+        will be returned, see GetAllValues for getting all values with multikey.
+
+        @param a_pSection       Section to search
+        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
+        @param a_nDefault       Value to return if the key is not found
+        @param a_pHasMultiple   Optionally receive notification of if there are
+                                multiple entries for this key.
+
+        @return a_nDefault      Key was not found in the section
+        @return other           Value of the key
+     */
+    long GetLongValue(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        long            a_nDefault     = 0,
+        bool *          a_pHasMultiple = NULL
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Retrieve a boolean value for a specific key. If multiple keys are enabled
+        (see SetMultiKey) then only the first value associated with that key
+        will be returned, see GetAllValues for getting all values with multikey.
+
+        Strings starting with "t", "y", "on" or "1" are returned as logically true.
+        Strings starting with "f", "n", "of" or "0" are returned as logically false.
+        For all other values the default is returned. Character comparisons are 
+        case-insensitive.
+
+        @param a_pSection       Section to search
+        @param a_pKey           Key to search for
+        @param a_bDefault       Value to return if the key is not found
+        @param a_pHasMultiple   Optionally receive notification of if there are
+                                multiple entries for this key.
+
+        @return a_nDefault      Key was not found in the section
+        @return other           Value of the key
+     */
+    bool GetBoolValue(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        bool            a_bDefault     = false,
+        bool *          a_pHasMultiple = NULL
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Add or update a section or value. This will always insert
+        when multiple keys are enabled.
+
+        @param a_pSection   Section to add or update
+        @param a_pKey       Key to add or update. Set to NULL to
+                            create an empty section.
+        @param a_pValue     Value to set. Set to NULL to create an
+                            empty section.
+        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the section or the
+                            key. If a_pKey is NULL then it will be associated
+                            with the section, otherwise the key. Note that a
+                            comment may be set ONLY when the section or key is
+                            first created (i.e. when this function returns the
+                            value SI_INSERTED). If you wish to create a section
+                            with a comment then you need to create the section
+                            separately to the key. The comment string must be
+                            in full comment form already (have a comment
+                            character starting every line).
+        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
+                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
+                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
+                            difference between Delete/SetValue and SetValue
+                            with a_bForceReplace = true, is that the load 
+                            order and comment will be preserved this way.
+
+        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
+        @return SI_UPDATED  Value was updated
+        @return SI_INSERTED Value was inserted
+     */
+    SI_Error SetValue(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pValue,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment      = NULL,
+        bool            a_bForceReplace = false
+        )
+    {
+        return AddEntry(a_pSection, a_pKey, a_pValue, a_pComment, a_bForceReplace, true);
+    }
+
+    /** Add or update a numeric value. This will always insert
+        when multiple keys are enabled.
+
+        @param a_pSection   Section to add or update
+        @param a_pKey       Key to add or update. 
+        @param a_nValue     Value to set. 
+        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the key. See the 
+                            notes on SetValue() for comments.
+        @param a_bUseHex    By default the value will be written to the file 
+                            in decimal format. Set this to true to write it 
+                            as hexadecimal.
+        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
+                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
+                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
+                            difference between Delete/SetLongValue and 
+                            SetLongValue with a_bForceReplace = true, is that 
+                            the load order and comment will be preserved this 
+                            way.
+
+        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
+        @return SI_UPDATED  Value was updated
+        @return SI_INSERTED Value was inserted
+     */
+    SI_Error SetLongValue(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        long            a_nValue,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment      = NULL,
+        bool            a_bUseHex       = false,
+        bool            a_bForceReplace = false
+        );
+
+    /** Add or update a boolean value. This will always insert
+        when multiple keys are enabled.
+
+        @param a_pSection   Section to add or update
+        @param a_pKey       Key to add or update. 
+        @param a_bValue     Value to set. 
+        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the key. See the 
+                            notes on SetValue() for comments.
+        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
+                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
+                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
+                            difference between Delete/SetBoolValue and 
+                            SetBoolValue with a_bForceReplace = true, is that 
+                            the load order and comment will be preserved this 
+                            way.
+
+        @return SI_Error    See error definitions
+        @return SI_UPDATED  Value was updated
+        @return SI_INSERTED Value was inserted
+     */
+    SI_Error SetBoolValue(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        bool            a_nValue,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment      = NULL,
+        bool            a_bForceReplace = false
+        );
+
+    /** Delete an entire section, or a key from a section. Note that the
+        data returned by GetSection is invalid and must not be used after
+        anything has been deleted from that section using this method.
+        Note when multiple keys is enabled, this will delete all keys with
+        that name; there is no way to selectively delete individual key/values
+        in this situation.
+
+        @param a_pSection       Section to delete key from, or if
+                                a_pKey is NULL, the section to remove.
+        @param a_pKey           Key to remove from the section. Set to
+                                NULL to remove the entire section.
+        @param a_bRemoveEmpty   If the section is empty after this key has
+                                been deleted, should the empty section be
+                                removed?
+
+        @return true            Key or section was deleted.
+        @return false           Key or section was not found.
+     */
+    bool Delete(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        bool            a_bRemoveEmpty = false
+        );
+
+    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+    /** @}
+        @{ @name Converter */
+
+    /** Return a conversion object to convert text to the same encoding
+        as is used by the Save(), SaveFile() and SaveString() functions.
+        Use this to prepare the strings that you wish to append or prepend
+        to the output INI data.
+     */
+    Converter GetConverter() const {
+        return Converter(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
+    }
+
+    /*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+    /** @} */
+
+private:
+    // copying is not permitted
+    CSimpleIniTempl(const CSimpleIniTempl &); // disabled
+    CSimpleIniTempl & operator=(const CSimpleIniTempl &); // disabled
+
+    /** Parse the data looking for a file comment and store it if found.
+    */
+    SI_Error FindFileComment(
+        SI_CHAR *&      a_pData,
+        bool            a_bCopyStrings
+        );
+
+    /** Parse the data looking for the next valid entry. The memory pointed to
+        by a_pData is modified by inserting NULL characters. The pointer is
+        updated to the current location in the block of text.
+    */
+    bool FindEntry(
+        SI_CHAR *&  a_pData,
+        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pKey,
+        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pVal,
+        const SI_CHAR *&  a_pComment
+        ) const;
+
+    /** Add the section/key/value to our data.
+
+        @param a_pSection   Section name. Sections will be created if they
+                            don't already exist.
+        @param a_pKey       Key name. May be NULL to create an empty section.
+                            Existing entries will be updated. New entries will
+                            be created.
+        @param a_pValue     Value for the key.
+        @param a_pComment   Comment to be associated with the section or the
+                            key. If a_pKey is NULL then it will be associated
+                            with the section, otherwise the key. This must be
+                            a string in full comment form already (have a
+                            comment character starting every line).
+        @param a_bForceReplace  Should all existing values in a multi-key INI
+                            file be replaced with this entry. This option has
+                            no effect if not using multi-key files. The 
+                            difference between Delete/AddEntry and AddEntry
+                            with a_bForceReplace = true, is that the load 
+                            order and comment will be preserved this way.
+        @param a_bCopyStrings   Should copies of the strings be made or not.
+                            If false then the pointers will be used as is.
+    */
+    SI_Error AddEntry(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pValue,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
+        bool            a_bForceReplace,
+        bool            a_bCopyStrings
+        );
+
+    /** Is the supplied character a whitespace character? */
+    inline bool IsSpace(SI_CHAR ch) const {
+        return (ch == ' ' || ch == '\t' || ch == '\r' || ch == '\n');
+    }
+
+    /** Does the supplied character start a comment line? */
+    inline bool IsComment(SI_CHAR ch) const {
+        return (ch == ';' || ch == '#');
+    }
+
+
+    /** Skip over a newline character (or characters) for either DOS or UNIX */
+    inline void SkipNewLine(SI_CHAR *& a_pData) const {
+        a_pData += (*a_pData == '\r' && *(a_pData+1) == '\n') ? 2 : 1;
+    }
+
+    /** Make a copy of the supplied string, replacing the original pointer */
+    SI_Error CopyString(const SI_CHAR *& a_pString);
+
+    /** Delete a string from the copied strings buffer if necessary */
+    void DeleteString(const SI_CHAR * a_pString);
+
+    /** Internal use of our string comparison function */
+    bool IsLess(const SI_CHAR * a_pLeft, const SI_CHAR * a_pRight) const {
+        const static SI_STRLESS isLess = SI_STRLESS();
+        return isLess(a_pLeft, a_pRight);
+    }
+
+    bool IsMultiLineTag(const SI_CHAR * a_pData) const;
+    bool IsMultiLineData(const SI_CHAR * a_pData) const;
+    bool LoadMultiLineText(
+        SI_CHAR *&          a_pData,
+        const SI_CHAR *&    a_pVal,
+        const SI_CHAR *     a_pTagName,
+        bool                a_bAllowBlankLinesInComment = false
+        ) const;
+    bool IsNewLineChar(SI_CHAR a_c) const;
+
+    bool OutputMultiLineText(
+        OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
+        Converter &     a_oConverter,
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pText
+        ) const;
+
+private:
+    /** Copy of the INI file data in our character format. This will be
+        modified when parsed to have NULL characters added after all
+        interesting string entries. All of the string pointers to sections,
+        keys and values point into this block of memory.
+     */
+    SI_CHAR * m_pData;
+
+    /** Length of the data that we have stored. Used when deleting strings
+        to determine if the string is stored here or in the allocated string
+        buffer.
+     */
+    size_t m_uDataLen;
+
+    /** File comment for this data, if one exists. */
+    const SI_CHAR * m_pFileComment;
+
+    /** Parsed INI data. Section -> (Key -> Value). */
+    TSection m_data;
+
+    /** This vector stores allocated memory for copies of strings that have
+        been supplied after the file load. It will be empty unless SetValue()
+        has been called.
+     */
+    TNamesDepend m_strings;
+
+    /** Is the format of our datafile UTF-8 or MBCS? */
+    bool m_bStoreIsUtf8;
+
+    /** Are multiple values permitted for the same key? */
+    bool m_bAllowMultiKey;
+
+    /** Are data values permitted to span multiple lines? */
+    bool m_bAllowMultiLine;
+
+    /** Next order value, used to ensure sections and keys are output in the
+        same order that they are loaded/added.
+     */
+    int m_nOrder;
+};
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//                                  IMPLEMENTATION
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+template
+CSimpleIniTempl::CSimpleIniTempl(
+    bool a_bIsUtf8,
+    bool a_bAllowMultiKey,
+    bool a_bAllowMultiLine
+    )
+  : m_pData(0)
+  , m_uDataLen(0)
+  , m_pFileComment(NULL)
+  , m_bStoreIsUtf8(a_bIsUtf8)
+  , m_bAllowMultiKey(a_bAllowMultiKey)
+  , m_bAllowMultiLine(a_bAllowMultiLine)
+  , m_nOrder(0)
+{ }
+
+template
+CSimpleIniTempl::~CSimpleIniTempl()
+{
+    Reset();
+}
+
+template
+void
+CSimpleIniTempl::Reset()
+{
+    // remove all data
+    delete[] m_pData;
+    m_pData = NULL;
+    m_uDataLen = 0;
+    m_pFileComment = NULL;
+    if (!m_data.empty()) {
+        m_data.erase(m_data.begin(), m_data.end());
+    }
+
+    // remove all strings
+    if (!m_strings.empty()) {
+        typename TNamesDepend::iterator i = m_strings.begin();
+        for (; i != m_strings.end(); ++i) {
+            delete[] const_cast(i->pItem);
+        }
+        m_strings.erase(m_strings.begin(), m_strings.end());
+    }
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::LoadFile(
+    const char * a_pszFile
+    )
+{
+    FILE * fp = NULL;
+#if __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__ && !_WIN32_WCE
+    fopen_s(&fp, a_pszFile, "rb");
+#else // !__STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
+    fp = fopen(a_pszFile, "rb");
+#endif // __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
+    if (!fp) {
+        return SI_FILE;
+    }
+    SI_Error rc = LoadFile(fp);
+    fclose(fp);
+    return rc;
+}
+
+#ifdef SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::LoadFile(
+    const SI_WCHAR_T * a_pwszFile
+    )
+{
+#ifdef _WIN32
+    FILE * fp = NULL;
+#if __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__ && !_WIN32_WCE
+    _wfopen_s(&fp, a_pwszFile, L"rb");
+#else // !__STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
+    fp = _wfopen(a_pwszFile, L"rb");
+#endif // __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
+    if (!fp) return SI_FILE;
+    SI_Error rc = LoadFile(fp);
+    fclose(fp);
+    return rc;
+#else // !_WIN32 (therefore SI_CONVERT_ICU)
+    char szFile[256];
+    u_austrncpy(szFile, a_pwszFile, sizeof(szFile));
+    return LoadFile(szFile);
+#endif // _WIN32
+}
+#endif // SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::LoadFile(
+    FILE * a_fpFile
+    )
+{
+    // load the raw file data
+    int retval = fseek(a_fpFile, 0, SEEK_END);
+    if (retval != 0) {
+        return SI_FILE;
+    }
+    long lSize = ftell(a_fpFile);
+    if (lSize < 0) {
+        return SI_FILE;
+    }
+    if (lSize == 0) {
+        return SI_OK;
+    }
+    char * pData = new char[lSize];
+    if (!pData) {
+        return SI_NOMEM;
+    }
+    fseek(a_fpFile, 0, SEEK_SET);
+    size_t uRead = fread(pData, sizeof(char), lSize, a_fpFile);
+    if (uRead != (size_t) lSize) {
+        delete[] pData;
+        return SI_FILE;
+    }
+
+    // convert the raw data to unicode
+    SI_Error rc = Load(pData, uRead);
+    delete[] pData;
+    return rc;
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::Load(
+    const char *    a_pData,
+    size_t          a_uDataLen
+    )
+{
+    SI_CONVERTER converter(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
+
+    if (a_uDataLen == 0) {
+        return SI_OK;
+    }
+
+    // consume the UTF-8 BOM if it exists
+    if (m_bStoreIsUtf8 && a_uDataLen >= 3) {
+        if (memcmp(a_pData, SI_UTF8_SIGNATURE, 3) == 0) {
+            a_pData    += 3;
+            a_uDataLen -= 3;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // determine the length of the converted data
+    size_t uLen = converter.SizeFromStore(a_pData, a_uDataLen);
+    if (uLen == (size_t)(-1)) {
+        return SI_FAIL;
+    }
+
+    // allocate memory for the data, ensure that there is a NULL
+    // terminator wherever the converted data ends
+    SI_CHAR * pData = new SI_CHAR[uLen+1];
+    if (!pData) {
+        return SI_NOMEM;
+    }
+    memset(pData, 0, sizeof(SI_CHAR)*(uLen+1));
+
+    // convert the data
+    if (!converter.ConvertFromStore(a_pData, a_uDataLen, pData, uLen)) {
+        delete[] pData;
+        return SI_FAIL;
+    }
+
+    // parse it
+    const static SI_CHAR empty = 0;
+    SI_CHAR * pWork = pData;
+    const SI_CHAR * pSection = ∅
+    const SI_CHAR * pItem = NULL;
+    const SI_CHAR * pVal = NULL;
+    const SI_CHAR * pComment = NULL;
+
+    // We copy the strings if we are loading data into this class when we
+    // already have stored some.
+    bool bCopyStrings = (m_pData != NULL);
+
+    // find a file comment if it exists, this is a comment that starts at the
+    // beginning of the file and continues until the first blank line.
+    SI_Error rc = FindFileComment(pWork, bCopyStrings);
+    if (rc < 0) return rc;
+
+    // add every entry in the file to the data table
+    while (FindEntry(pWork, pSection, pItem, pVal, pComment)) {
+        rc = AddEntry(pSection, pItem, pVal, pComment, false, bCopyStrings);
+        if (rc < 0) return rc;
+    }
+
+    // store these strings if we didn't copy them
+    if (bCopyStrings) {
+        delete[] pData;
+    }
+    else {
+        m_pData = pData;
+        m_uDataLen = uLen+1;
+    }
+
+    return SI_OK;
+}
+
+#ifdef SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::Load(
+    std::istream & a_istream
+    )
+{
+    std::string strData;
+    char szBuf[512];
+    do {
+        a_istream.get(szBuf, sizeof(szBuf), '\0');
+        strData.append(szBuf);
+    }
+    while (a_istream.good());
+    return Load(strData);
+}
+#endif // SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::FindFileComment(
+    SI_CHAR *&      a_pData,
+    bool            a_bCopyStrings
+    )
+{
+    // there can only be a single file comment
+    if (m_pFileComment) {
+        return SI_OK;
+    }
+
+    // Load the file comment as multi-line text, this will modify all of
+    // the newline characters to be single \n chars
+    if (!LoadMultiLineText(a_pData, m_pFileComment, NULL, false)) {
+        return SI_OK;
+    }
+
+    // copy the string if necessary
+    if (a_bCopyStrings) {
+        SI_Error rc = CopyString(m_pFileComment);
+        if (rc < 0) return rc;
+    }
+
+    return SI_OK;
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::FindEntry(
+    SI_CHAR *&        a_pData,
+    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pKey,
+    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pVal,
+    const SI_CHAR *&  a_pComment
+    ) const
+{
+    a_pComment = NULL;
+
+    SI_CHAR * pTrail = NULL;
+    while (*a_pData) {
+        // skip spaces and empty lines
+        while (*a_pData && IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
+            ++a_pData;
+        }
+        if (!*a_pData) {
+            break;
+        }
+
+        // skip processing of comment lines but keep a pointer to
+        // the start of the comment.
+        if (IsComment(*a_pData)) {
+            LoadMultiLineText(a_pData, a_pComment, NULL, true);
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        // process section names
+        if (*a_pData == '[') {
+            // skip leading spaces
+            ++a_pData;
+            while (*a_pData && IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
+                ++a_pData;
+            }
+
+            // find the end of the section name (it may contain spaces)
+            // and convert it to lowercase as necessary
+            a_pSection = a_pData;
+            while (*a_pData && *a_pData != ']' && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
+                ++a_pData;
+            }
+
+            // if it's an invalid line, just skip it
+            if (*a_pData != ']') {
+                continue;
+            }
+
+            // remove trailing spaces from the section
+            pTrail = a_pData - 1;
+            while (pTrail >= a_pSection && IsSpace(*pTrail)) {
+                --pTrail;
+            }
+            ++pTrail;
+            *pTrail = 0;
+
+            // skip to the end of the line
+            ++a_pData;  // safe as checked that it == ']' above
+            while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
+                ++a_pData;
+            }
+
+            a_pKey = NULL;
+            a_pVal = NULL;
+            return true;
+        }
+
+        // find the end of the key name (it may contain spaces)
+        // and convert it to lowercase as necessary
+        a_pKey = a_pData;
+        while (*a_pData && *a_pData != '=' && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
+            ++a_pData;
+        }
+
+        // if it's an invalid line, just skip it
+        if (*a_pData != '=') {
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        // empty keys are invalid
+        if (a_pKey == a_pData) {
+            while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
+                ++a_pData;
+            }
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        // remove trailing spaces from the key
+        pTrail = a_pData - 1;
+        while (pTrail >= a_pKey && IsSpace(*pTrail)) {
+            --pTrail;
+        }
+        ++pTrail;
+        *pTrail = 0;
+
+        // skip leading whitespace on the value
+        ++a_pData;  // safe as checked that it == '=' above
+        while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData) && IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
+            ++a_pData;
+        }
+
+        // find the end of the value which is the end of this line
+        a_pVal = a_pData;
+        while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
+            ++a_pData;
+        }
+
+        // remove trailing spaces from the value
+        pTrail = a_pData - 1;
+        if (*a_pData) { // prepare for the next round
+            SkipNewLine(a_pData);
+        }
+        while (pTrail >= a_pVal && IsSpace(*pTrail)) {
+            --pTrail;
+        }
+        ++pTrail;
+        *pTrail = 0;
+
+        // check for multi-line entries
+        if (m_bAllowMultiLine && IsMultiLineTag(a_pVal)) {
+            // skip the "<<<" to get the tag that will end the multiline
+            const SI_CHAR * pTagName = a_pVal + 3;
+            return LoadMultiLineText(a_pData, a_pVal, pTagName);
+        }
+
+        // return the standard entry
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    return false;
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::IsMultiLineTag(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pVal
+    ) const
+{
+    // check for the "<<<" prefix for a multi-line entry
+    if (*a_pVal++ != '<') return false;
+    if (*a_pVal++ != '<') return false;
+    if (*a_pVal++ != '<') return false;
+    return true;
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::IsMultiLineData(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pData
+    ) const
+{
+    // data is multi-line if it has any of the following features:
+    //  * whitespace prefix
+    //  * embedded newlines
+    //  * whitespace suffix
+
+    // empty string
+    if (!*a_pData) {
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // check for prefix
+    if (IsSpace(*a_pData)) {
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    // embedded newlines
+    while (*a_pData) {
+        if (IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) {
+            return true;
+        }
+        ++a_pData;
+    }
+
+    // check for suffix
+    if (IsSpace(*--a_pData)) {
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    return false;
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::IsNewLineChar(
+    SI_CHAR a_c
+    ) const
+{
+    return (a_c == '\n' || a_c == '\r');
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::LoadMultiLineText(
+    SI_CHAR *&          a_pData,
+    const SI_CHAR *&    a_pVal,
+    const SI_CHAR *     a_pTagName,
+    bool                a_bAllowBlankLinesInComment
+    ) const
+{
+    // we modify this data to strip all newlines down to a single '\n'
+    // character. This means that on Windows we need to strip out some
+    // characters which will make the data shorter.
+    // i.e.  LINE1-LINE1\r\nLINE2-LINE2\0 will become
+    //       LINE1-LINE1\nLINE2-LINE2\0
+    // The pDataLine entry is the pointer to the location in memory that
+    // the current line needs to start to run following the existing one.
+    // This may be the same as pCurrLine in which case no move is needed.
+    SI_CHAR * pDataLine = a_pData;
+    SI_CHAR * pCurrLine;
+
+    // value starts at the current line
+    a_pVal = a_pData;
+
+    // find the end tag. This tag must start in column 1 and be
+    // followed by a newline. No whitespace removal is done while
+    // searching for this tag.
+    SI_CHAR cEndOfLineChar = *a_pData;
+    for(;;) {
+        // if we are loading comments then we need a comment character as
+        // the first character on every line
+        if (!a_pTagName && !IsComment(*a_pData)) {
+            // if we aren't allowing blank lines then we're done
+            if (!a_bAllowBlankLinesInComment) {
+                break;
+            }
+
+            // if we are allowing blank lines then we only include them
+            // in this comment if another comment follows, so read ahead
+            // to find out.
+            SI_CHAR * pCurr = a_pData;
+            int nNewLines = 0;
+            while (IsSpace(*pCurr)) {
+                if (IsNewLineChar(*pCurr)) {
+                    ++nNewLines;
+                    SkipNewLine(pCurr);
+                }
+                else {
+                    ++pCurr;
+                }
+            }
+
+            // we have a comment, add the blank lines to the output
+            // and continue processing from here
+            if (IsComment(*pCurr)) {
+                for (; nNewLines > 0; --nNewLines) *pDataLine++ = '\n';
+                a_pData = pCurr;
+                continue;
+            }
+
+            // the comment ends here
+            break;
+        }
+
+        // find the end of this line
+        pCurrLine = a_pData;
+        while (*a_pData && !IsNewLineChar(*a_pData)) ++a_pData;
+
+        // move this line down to the location that it should be if necessary
+        if (pDataLine < pCurrLine) {
+            size_t nLen = (size_t) (a_pData - pCurrLine);
+            memmove(pDataLine, pCurrLine, nLen * sizeof(SI_CHAR));
+            pDataLine[nLen] = '\0';
+        }
+
+        // end the line with a NULL
+        cEndOfLineChar = *a_pData;
+        *a_pData = 0;
+
+        // if are looking for a tag then do the check now. This is done before
+        // checking for end of the data, so that if we have the tag at the end
+        // of the data then the tag is removed correctly.
+        if (a_pTagName &&
+            (!IsLess(pDataLine, a_pTagName) && !IsLess(a_pTagName, pDataLine)))
+        {
+            break;
+        }
+
+        // if we are at the end of the data then we just automatically end
+        // this entry and return the current data.
+        if (!cEndOfLineChar) {
+            return true;
+        }
+
+        // otherwise we need to process this newline to ensure that it consists
+        // of just a single \n character.
+        pDataLine += (a_pData - pCurrLine);
+        *a_pData = cEndOfLineChar;
+        SkipNewLine(a_pData);
+        *pDataLine++ = '\n';
+    }
+
+    // if we didn't find a comment at all then return false
+    if (a_pVal == a_pData) {
+        a_pVal = NULL;
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // the data (which ends at the end of the last line) needs to be
+    // null-terminated BEFORE before the newline character(s). If the
+    // user wants a new line in the multi-line data then they need to
+    // add an empty line before the tag.
+    *--pDataLine = '\0';
+
+    // if looking for a tag and if we aren't at the end of the data,
+    // then move a_pData to the start of the next line.
+    if (a_pTagName && cEndOfLineChar) {
+        SI_ASSERT(IsNewLineChar(cEndOfLineChar));
+        *a_pData = cEndOfLineChar;
+        SkipNewLine(a_pData);
+    }
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::CopyString(
+    const SI_CHAR *& a_pString
+    )
+{
+    size_t uLen = 0;
+    if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(char)) {
+        uLen = strlen((const char *)a_pString);
+    }
+    else if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(wchar_t)) {
+        uLen = wcslen((const wchar_t *)a_pString);
+    }
+    else {
+        for ( ; a_pString[uLen]; ++uLen) /*loop*/ ;
+    }
+    ++uLen; // NULL character
+    SI_CHAR * pCopy = new SI_CHAR[uLen];
+    if (!pCopy) {
+        return SI_NOMEM;
+    }
+    memcpy(pCopy, a_pString, sizeof(SI_CHAR)*uLen);
+    m_strings.push_back(pCopy);
+    a_pString = pCopy;
+    return SI_OK;
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::AddEntry(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pValue,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
+    bool            a_bForceReplace,
+    bool            a_bCopyStrings
+    )
+{
+    SI_Error rc;
+    bool bInserted = false;
+
+    SI_ASSERT(!a_pComment || IsComment(*a_pComment));
+
+    // if we are copying strings then make a copy of the comment now
+    // because we will need it when we add the entry.
+    if (a_bCopyStrings && a_pComment) {
+        rc = CopyString(a_pComment);
+        if (rc < 0) return rc;
+    }
+
+    // create the section entry if necessary
+    typename TSection::iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
+    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
+        // if the section doesn't exist then we need a copy as the
+        // string needs to last beyond the end of this function
+        if (a_bCopyStrings) {
+            rc = CopyString(a_pSection);
+            if (rc < 0) return rc;
+        }
+
+        // only set the comment if this is a section only entry
+        Entry oSection(a_pSection, ++m_nOrder);
+        if (a_pComment && (!a_pKey || !a_pValue)) {
+            oSection.pComment = a_pComment;
+        }
+
+        typename TSection::value_type oEntry(oSection, TKeyVal());
+        typedef typename TSection::iterator SectionIterator;
+        std::pair i = m_data.insert(oEntry);
+        iSection = i.first;
+        bInserted = true;
+    }
+    if (!a_pKey || !a_pValue) {
+        // section only entries are specified with pItem and pVal as NULL
+        return bInserted ? SI_INSERTED : SI_UPDATED;
+    }
+
+    // check for existence of the key
+    TKeyVal & keyval = iSection->second;
+    typename TKeyVal::iterator iKey = keyval.find(a_pKey);
+
+    // remove all existing entries but save the load order and
+    // comment of the first entry
+    int nLoadOrder = ++m_nOrder;
+    if (iKey != keyval.end() && m_bAllowMultiKey && a_bForceReplace) {
+        const SI_CHAR * pComment = NULL;
+        while (iKey != keyval.end() && !IsLess(a_pKey, iKey->first.pItem)) {
+            if (iKey->first.nOrder < nLoadOrder) {
+                nLoadOrder = iKey->first.nOrder;
+                pComment   = iKey->first.pComment;
+            }
+            ++iKey;
+        }
+        if (pComment) {
+            DeleteString(a_pComment);
+            a_pComment = pComment;
+            CopyString(a_pComment);
+        }
+        Delete(a_pSection, a_pKey);
+        iKey = keyval.end();
+    }
+
+    // make string copies if necessary
+    bool bForceCreateNewKey = m_bAllowMultiKey && !a_bForceReplace;
+    if (a_bCopyStrings) {
+        if (bForceCreateNewKey || iKey == keyval.end()) {
+            // if the key doesn't exist then we need a copy as the
+            // string needs to last beyond the end of this function
+            // because we will be inserting the key next
+            rc = CopyString(a_pKey);
+            if (rc < 0) return rc;
+        }
+
+        // we always need a copy of the value
+        rc = CopyString(a_pValue);
+        if (rc < 0) return rc;
+    }
+
+    // create the key entry
+    if (iKey == keyval.end() || bForceCreateNewKey) {
+        Entry oKey(a_pKey, nLoadOrder);
+        if (a_pComment) {
+            oKey.pComment = a_pComment;
+        }
+        typename TKeyVal::value_type oEntry(oKey, NULL);
+        iKey = keyval.insert(oEntry);
+        bInserted = true;
+    }
+    iKey->second = a_pValue;
+    return bInserted ? SI_INSERTED : SI_UPDATED;
+}
+
+template
+const SI_CHAR *
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetValue(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pDefault,
+    bool *          a_pHasMultiple
+    ) const
+{
+    if (a_pHasMultiple) {
+        *a_pHasMultiple = false;
+    }
+    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) {
+        return a_pDefault;
+    }
+    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
+    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
+        return a_pDefault;
+    }
+    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.find(a_pKey);
+    if (iKeyVal == iSection->second.end()) {
+        return a_pDefault;
+    }
+
+    // check for multiple entries with the same key
+    if (m_bAllowMultiKey && a_pHasMultiple) {
+        typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iTemp = iKeyVal;
+        if (++iTemp != iSection->second.end()) {
+            if (!IsLess(a_pKey, iTemp->first.pItem)) {
+                *a_pHasMultiple = true;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    return iKeyVal->second;
+}
+
+template
+long
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetLongValue(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    long            a_nDefault,
+    bool *          a_pHasMultiple
+    ) const
+{
+    // return the default if we don't have a value
+    const SI_CHAR * pszValue = GetValue(a_pSection, a_pKey, NULL, a_pHasMultiple);
+    if (!pszValue || !*pszValue) return a_nDefault;
+
+    // convert to UTF-8/MBCS which for a numeric value will be the same as ASCII
+    char szValue[64] = { 0 };
+    SI_CONVERTER c(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
+    if (!c.ConvertToStore(pszValue, szValue, sizeof(szValue))) {
+        return a_nDefault;
+    }
+
+    // handle the value as hex if prefaced with "0x"
+    long nValue = a_nDefault;
+    char * pszSuffix = szValue;
+    if (szValue[0] == '0' && (szValue[1] == 'x' || szValue[1] == 'X')) {
+    	if (!szValue[2]) return a_nDefault;
+        nValue = strtol(&szValue[2], &pszSuffix, 16);
+    }
+    else {
+        nValue = strtol(szValue, &pszSuffix, 10);
+    }
+
+    // any invalid strings will return the default value
+    if (*pszSuffix) { 
+        return a_nDefault; 
+    }
+
+    return nValue;
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error 
+CSimpleIniTempl::SetLongValue(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    long            a_nValue,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
+    bool            a_bUseHex,
+    bool            a_bForceReplace
+    )
+{
+    // use SetValue to create sections
+    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) return SI_FAIL;
+
+    // convert to an ASCII string
+    char szInput[64];
+    sprintf(szInput, a_bUseHex ? "0x%lx" : "%ld", a_nValue);
+
+    // convert to output text
+    SI_CHAR szOutput[64];
+    SI_CONVERTER c(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
+    c.ConvertFromStore(szInput, strlen(szInput) + 1, 
+        szOutput, sizeof(szOutput) / sizeof(SI_CHAR));
+
+    // actually add it
+    return AddEntry(a_pSection, a_pKey, szOutput, a_pComment, a_bForceReplace, true);
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetBoolValue(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    bool            a_bDefault,
+    bool *          a_pHasMultiple
+    ) const
+{
+    // return the default if we don't have a value
+    const SI_CHAR * pszValue = GetValue(a_pSection, a_pKey, NULL, a_pHasMultiple);
+    if (!pszValue || !*pszValue) return a_bDefault;
+
+    // we only look at the minimum number of characters
+    switch (pszValue[0]) {
+    case 't': case 'T': // true
+    case 'y': case 'Y': // yes
+    case '1':           // 1 (one)
+        return true;
+
+    case 'f': case 'F': // false
+    case 'n': case 'N': // no
+    case '0':           // 0 (zero)
+        return false;
+
+    case 'o': case 'O':
+        if (pszValue[1] == 'n' || pszValue[1] == 'N') return true;  // on
+        if (pszValue[1] == 'f' || pszValue[1] == 'F') return false; // off
+        break;
+    }
+
+    // no recognized value, return the default
+    return a_bDefault;
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error 
+CSimpleIniTempl::SetBoolValue(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    bool            a_bValue,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pComment,
+    bool            a_bForceReplace
+    )
+{
+    // use SetValue to create sections
+    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) return SI_FAIL;
+
+    // convert to an ASCII string
+    const char * pszInput = a_bValue ? "true" : "false";
+
+    // convert to output text
+    SI_CHAR szOutput[64];
+    SI_CONVERTER c(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
+    c.ConvertFromStore(pszInput, strlen(pszInput) + 1, 
+        szOutput, sizeof(szOutput) / sizeof(SI_CHAR));
+
+    // actually add it
+    return AddEntry(a_pSection, a_pKey, szOutput, a_pComment, a_bForceReplace, true);
+}
+    
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetAllValues(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    TNamesDepend &  a_values
+    ) const
+{
+    a_values.clear();
+
+    if (!a_pSection || !a_pKey) {
+        return false;
+    }
+    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
+    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
+        return false;
+    }
+    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.find(a_pKey);
+    if (iKeyVal == iSection->second.end()) {
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // insert all values for this key
+    a_values.push_back(Entry(iKeyVal->second, iKeyVal->first.pComment, iKeyVal->first.nOrder));
+    if (m_bAllowMultiKey) {
+        ++iKeyVal;
+        while (iKeyVal != iSection->second.end() && !IsLess(a_pKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem)) {
+            a_values.push_back(Entry(iKeyVal->second, iKeyVal->first.pComment, iKeyVal->first.nOrder));
+            ++iKeyVal;
+        }
+    }
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+template
+int
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetSectionSize(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
+    ) const
+{
+    if (!a_pSection) {
+        return -1;
+    }
+
+    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
+    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
+        return -1;
+    }
+    const TKeyVal & section = iSection->second;
+
+    // if multi-key isn't permitted then the section size is
+    // the number of keys that we have.
+    if (!m_bAllowMultiKey || section.empty()) {
+        return (int) section.size();
+    }
+
+    // otherwise we need to count them
+    int nCount = 0;
+    const SI_CHAR * pLastKey = NULL;
+    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = section.begin();
+    for (int n = 0; iKeyVal != section.end(); ++iKeyVal, ++n) {
+        if (!pLastKey || IsLess(pLastKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem)) {
+            ++nCount;
+            pLastKey = iKeyVal->first.pItem;
+        }
+    }
+    return nCount;
+}
+
+template
+const typename CSimpleIniTempl::TKeyVal *
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetSection(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection
+    ) const
+{
+    if (a_pSection) {
+        typename TSection::const_iterator i = m_data.find(a_pSection);
+        if (i != m_data.end()) {
+            return &(i->second);
+        }
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+template
+void
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetAllSections(
+    TNamesDepend & a_names
+    ) const
+{
+    a_names.clear();
+    typename TSection::const_iterator i = m_data.begin();
+    for (int n = 0; i != m_data.end(); ++i, ++n ) {
+        a_names.push_back(i->first);
+    }
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::GetAllKeys(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    TNamesDepend &  a_names
+    ) const
+{
+    a_names.clear();
+
+    if (!a_pSection) {
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    typename TSection::const_iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
+    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    const TKeyVal & section = iSection->second;
+    const SI_CHAR * pLastKey = NULL;
+    typename TKeyVal::const_iterator iKeyVal = section.begin();
+    for (int n = 0; iKeyVal != section.end(); ++iKeyVal, ++n ) {
+        if (!pLastKey || IsLess(pLastKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem)) {
+            a_names.push_back(iKeyVal->first);
+            pLastKey = iKeyVal->first.pItem;
+        }
+    }
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::SaveFile(
+    const char *    a_pszFile,
+    bool            a_bAddSignature
+    ) const
+{
+    FILE * fp = NULL;
+#if __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__ && !_WIN32_WCE
+    fopen_s(&fp, a_pszFile, "wb");
+#else // !__STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
+    fp = fopen(a_pszFile, "wb");
+#endif // __STDC_WANT_SECURE_LIB__
+    if (!fp) return SI_FILE;
+    SI_Error rc = SaveFile(fp, a_bAddSignature);
+    fclose(fp);
+    return rc;
+}
+
+#ifdef SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::SaveFile(
+    const SI_WCHAR_T *  a_pwszFile,
+    bool                a_bAddSignature
+    ) const
+{
+#ifdef _WIN32
+    FILE * fp = _wfopen(a_pwszFile, L"wb");
+    if (!fp) return SI_FILE;
+    SI_Error rc = SaveFile(fp, a_bAddSignature);
+    fclose(fp);
+    return rc;
+#else // !_WIN32 (therefore SI_CONVERT_ICU)
+    char szFile[256];
+    u_austrncpy(szFile, a_pwszFile, sizeof(szFile));
+    return SaveFile(szFile, a_bAddSignature);
+#endif // _WIN32
+}
+#endif // SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::SaveFile(
+    FILE *  a_pFile,
+    bool    a_bAddSignature
+    ) const
+{
+    FileWriter writer(a_pFile);
+    return Save(writer, a_bAddSignature);
+}
+
+template
+SI_Error
+CSimpleIniTempl::Save(
+    OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
+    bool            a_bAddSignature
+    ) const
+{
+    Converter convert(m_bStoreIsUtf8);
+
+    // add the UTF-8 signature if it is desired
+    if (m_bStoreIsUtf8 && a_bAddSignature) {
+        a_oOutput.Write(SI_UTF8_SIGNATURE);
+    }
+
+    // get all of the sections sorted in load order
+    TNamesDepend oSections;
+    GetAllSections(oSections);
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1200
+    oSections.sort();
+#elif defined(__BORLANDC__)
+    oSections.sort(Entry::LoadOrder());
+#else
+    oSections.sort(typename Entry::LoadOrder());
+#endif
+
+    // write the file comment if we have one
+    bool bNeedNewLine = false;
+    if (m_pFileComment) {
+        if (!OutputMultiLineText(a_oOutput, convert, m_pFileComment)) {
+            return SI_FAIL;
+        }
+        bNeedNewLine = true;
+    }
+
+    // iterate through our sections and output the data
+    typename TNamesDepend::const_iterator iSection = oSections.begin();
+    for ( ; iSection != oSections.end(); ++iSection ) {
+        // write out the comment if there is one
+        if (iSection->pComment) {
+            if (bNeedNewLine) {
+                a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+                a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+            }
+            if (!OutputMultiLineText(a_oOutput, convert, iSection->pComment)) {
+                return SI_FAIL;
+            }
+            bNeedNewLine = false;
+        }
+
+        if (bNeedNewLine) {
+            a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+            a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+            bNeedNewLine = false;
+        }
+
+        // write the section (unless there is no section name)
+        if (*iSection->pItem) {
+            if (!convert.ConvertToStore(iSection->pItem)) {
+                return SI_FAIL;
+            }
+            a_oOutput.Write("[");
+            a_oOutput.Write(convert.Data());
+            a_oOutput.Write("]");
+            a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+        }
+
+        // get all of the keys sorted in load order
+        TNamesDepend oKeys;
+        GetAllKeys(iSection->pItem, oKeys);
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1200
+        oKeys.sort();
+#elif defined(__BORLANDC__)
+        oKeys.sort(Entry::LoadOrder());
+#else
+        oKeys.sort(typename Entry::LoadOrder());
+#endif
+
+        // write all keys and values
+        typename TNamesDepend::const_iterator iKey = oKeys.begin();
+        for ( ; iKey != oKeys.end(); ++iKey) {
+            // get all values for this key
+            TNamesDepend oValues;
+            GetAllValues(iSection->pItem, iKey->pItem, oValues);
+
+            typename TNamesDepend::const_iterator iValue = oValues.begin();
+            for ( ; iValue != oValues.end(); ++iValue) {
+                // write out the comment if there is one
+                if (iValue->pComment) {
+                    a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+                    if (!OutputMultiLineText(a_oOutput, convert, iValue->pComment)) {
+                        return SI_FAIL;
+                    }
+                }
+
+                // write the key
+                if (!convert.ConvertToStore(iKey->pItem)) {
+                    return SI_FAIL;
+                }
+                a_oOutput.Write(convert.Data());
+
+                // write the value
+                if (!convert.ConvertToStore(iValue->pItem)) {
+                    return SI_FAIL;
+                }
+                a_oOutput.Write(" = ");
+                if (m_bAllowMultiLine && IsMultiLineData(iValue->pItem)) {
+                    // multi-line data needs to be processed specially to ensure
+                    // that we use the correct newline format for the current system
+                    a_oOutput.Write("<<pItem)) {
+                        return SI_FAIL;
+                    }
+                    a_oOutput.Write("SI-END-OF-MULTILINE-TEXT");
+                }
+                else {
+                    a_oOutput.Write(convert.Data());
+                }
+                a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+            }
+        }
+
+        bNeedNewLine = true;
+    }
+
+    return SI_OK;
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::OutputMultiLineText(
+    OutputWriter &  a_oOutput,
+    Converter &     a_oConverter,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pText
+    ) const
+{
+    const SI_CHAR * pEndOfLine;
+    SI_CHAR cEndOfLineChar = *a_pText;
+    while (cEndOfLineChar) {
+        // find the end of this line
+        pEndOfLine = a_pText;
+        for (; *pEndOfLine && *pEndOfLine != '\n'; ++pEndOfLine) /*loop*/ ;
+        cEndOfLineChar = *pEndOfLine;
+
+        // temporarily null terminate, convert and output the line
+        *const_cast(pEndOfLine) = 0;
+        if (!a_oConverter.ConvertToStore(a_pText)) {
+            return false;
+        }
+        *const_cast(pEndOfLine) = cEndOfLineChar;
+        a_pText += (pEndOfLine - a_pText) + 1;
+        a_oOutput.Write(a_oConverter.Data());
+        a_oOutput.Write(SI_NEWLINE_A);
+    }
+    return true;
+}
+
+template
+bool
+CSimpleIniTempl::Delete(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pSection,
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pKey,
+    bool            a_bRemoveEmpty
+    )
+{
+    if (!a_pSection) {
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    typename TSection::iterator iSection = m_data.find(a_pSection);
+    if (iSection == m_data.end()) {
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // remove a single key if we have a keyname
+    if (a_pKey) {
+        typename TKeyVal::iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.find(a_pKey);
+        if (iKeyVal == iSection->second.end()) {
+            return false;
+        }
+
+        // remove any copied strings and then the key
+        typename TKeyVal::iterator iDelete;
+        do {
+            iDelete = iKeyVal++;
+
+            DeleteString(iDelete->first.pItem);
+            DeleteString(iDelete->second);
+            iSection->second.erase(iDelete);
+        }
+        while (iKeyVal != iSection->second.end()
+            && !IsLess(a_pKey, iKeyVal->first.pItem));
+
+        // done now if the section is not empty or we are not pruning away
+        // the empty sections. Otherwise let it fall through into the section
+        // deletion code
+        if (!a_bRemoveEmpty || !iSection->second.empty()) {
+            return true;
+        }
+    }
+    else {
+        // delete all copied strings from this section. The actual
+        // entries will be removed when the section is removed.
+        typename TKeyVal::iterator iKeyVal = iSection->second.begin();
+        for ( ; iKeyVal != iSection->second.end(); ++iKeyVal) {
+            DeleteString(iKeyVal->first.pItem);
+            DeleteString(iKeyVal->second);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // delete the section itself
+    DeleteString(iSection->first.pItem);
+    m_data.erase(iSection);
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+template
+void
+CSimpleIniTempl::DeleteString(
+    const SI_CHAR * a_pString
+    )
+{
+    // strings may exist either inside the data block, or they will be
+    // individually allocated and stored in m_strings. We only physically
+    // delete those stored in m_strings.
+    if (a_pString < m_pData || a_pString >= m_pData + m_uDataLen) {
+        typename TNamesDepend::iterator i = m_strings.begin();
+        for (;i != m_strings.end(); ++i) {
+            if (a_pString == i->pItem) {
+                delete[] const_cast(i->pItem);
+                m_strings.erase(i);
+                break;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//                              CONVERSION FUNCTIONS
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Defines the conversion classes for different libraries. Before including
+// SimpleIni.h, set the converter that you wish you use by defining one of the
+// following symbols.
+//
+//  SI_CONVERT_GENERIC      Use the Unicode reference conversion library in
+//                          the accompanying files ConvertUTF.h/c
+//  SI_CONVERT_ICU          Use the IBM ICU conversion library. Requires
+//                          ICU headers on include path and icuuc.lib
+//  SI_CONVERT_WIN32        Use the Win32 API functions for conversion.
+
+#if !defined(SI_CONVERT_GENERIC) && !defined(SI_CONVERT_WIN32) && !defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
+# ifdef _WIN32
+#  define SI_CONVERT_WIN32
+# else
+#  define SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
+# endif
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Generic case-sensitive less than comparison. This class returns numerically
+ * ordered ASCII case-sensitive text for all possible sizes and types of
+ * SI_CHAR.
+ */
+template
+struct SI_GenericCase {
+    bool operator()(const SI_CHAR * pLeft, const SI_CHAR * pRight) const {
+        long cmp;
+        for ( ;*pLeft && *pRight; ++pLeft, ++pRight) {
+            cmp = (long) *pLeft - (long) *pRight;
+            if (cmp != 0) {
+                return cmp < 0;
+            }
+        }
+        return *pRight != 0;
+    }
+};
+
+/**
+ * Generic ASCII case-insensitive less than comparison. This class returns
+ * numerically ordered ASCII case-insensitive text for all possible sizes
+ * and types of SI_CHAR. It is not safe for MBCS text comparison where
+ * ASCII A-Z characters are used in the encoding of multi-byte characters.
+ */
+template
+struct SI_GenericNoCase {
+    inline SI_CHAR locase(SI_CHAR ch) const {
+        return (ch < 'A' || ch > 'Z') ? ch : (ch - 'A' + 'a');
+    }
+    bool operator()(const SI_CHAR * pLeft, const SI_CHAR * pRight) const {
+        long cmp;
+        for ( ;*pLeft && *pRight; ++pLeft, ++pRight) {
+            cmp = (long) locase(*pLeft) - (long) locase(*pRight);
+            if (cmp != 0) {
+                return cmp < 0;
+            }
+        }
+        return *pRight != 0;
+    }
+};
+
+/**
+ * Null conversion class for MBCS/UTF-8 to char (or equivalent).
+ */
+template
+class SI_ConvertA {
+    bool m_bStoreIsUtf8;
+protected:
+    SI_ConvertA() { }
+public:
+    SI_ConvertA(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : m_bStoreIsUtf8(a_bStoreIsUtf8) { }
+
+    /* copy and assignment */
+    SI_ConvertA(const SI_ConvertA & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
+    SI_ConvertA & operator=(const SI_ConvertA & rhs) {
+        m_bStoreIsUtf8 = rhs.m_bStoreIsUtf8;
+        return *this;
+    }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of SI_CHAR required for converting the input
+     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @return              Number of SI_CHAR required by the string when
+     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
+     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
+     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
+    {
+        (void)a_pInputData;
+        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
+
+        // ASCII/MBCS/UTF-8 needs no conversion
+        return a_uInputDataLen;
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to SI_CHAR.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
+     *                      converted data.
+     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in SI_CHAR.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
+     *                      converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
+        SI_CHAR *       a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
+    {
+        // ASCII/MBCS/UTF-8 needs no conversion
+        if (a_uInputDataLen > a_uOutputDataSize) {
+            return false;
+        }
+        memcpy(a_pOutputData, a_pInputData, a_uInputDataLen);
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
+     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
+     *                      bytes required to be converted to storage format.
+     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
+     *                      converted to storage format. This size always
+     *                      includes space for the terminating NULL character.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeToStore(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData)
+    {
+        // ASCII/MBCS/UTF-8 needs no conversion
+        return strlen((const char *)a_pInputData) + 1;
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
+     *                      the data will be converted including the
+     *                      terminating NULL character.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
+     *                      string.
+     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
+     *                      terminating NULL character was successfully
+     *                      converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertToStore(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData,
+        char *          a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
+    {
+        // calc input string length (SI_CHAR type and size independent)
+        size_t uInputLen = strlen((const char *)a_pInputData) + 1;
+        if (uInputLen > a_uOutputDataSize) {
+            return false;
+        }
+
+        // ascii/UTF-8 needs no conversion
+        memcpy(a_pOutputData, a_pInputData, uInputLen);
+        return true;
+    }
+};
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//                              SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#ifdef SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
+
+#define SI_Case     SI_GenericCase
+#define SI_NoCase   SI_GenericNoCase
+
+#include 
+#include "ConvertUTF.h"
+
+/**
+ * Converts UTF-8 to a wchar_t (or equivalent) using the Unicode reference
+ * library functions. This can be used on all platforms.
+ */
+template
+class SI_ConvertW {
+    bool m_bStoreIsUtf8;
+protected:
+    SI_ConvertW() { }
+public:
+    SI_ConvertW(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : m_bStoreIsUtf8(a_bStoreIsUtf8) { }
+
+    /* copy and assignment */
+    SI_ConvertW(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
+    SI_ConvertW & operator=(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) {
+        m_bStoreIsUtf8 = rhs.m_bStoreIsUtf8;
+        return *this;
+    }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of SI_CHAR required for converting the input
+     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @return              Number of SI_CHAR required by the string when
+     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
+     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
+     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
+    {
+        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
+
+        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
+            // worst case scenario for UTF-8 to wchar_t is 1 char -> 1 wchar_t
+            // so we just return the same number of characters required as for
+            // the source text.
+            return a_uInputDataLen;
+        }
+        else {
+            return mbstowcs(NULL, a_pInputData, a_uInputDataLen);
+        }
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to SI_CHAR.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                       must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                       NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
+     *                       converted data.
+     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in SI_CHAR.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
+     *                       converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
+        SI_CHAR *       a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
+    {
+        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
+            // This uses the Unicode reference implementation to do the
+            // conversion from UTF-8 to wchar_t. The required files are
+            // ConvertUTF.h and ConvertUTF.c which should be included in
+            // the distribution but are publically available from unicode.org
+            // at http://www.unicode.org/Public/PROGRAMS/CVTUTF/
+            ConversionResult retval;
+            const UTF8 * pUtf8 = (const UTF8 *) a_pInputData;
+            if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF32)) {
+                UTF32 * pUtf32 = (UTF32 *) a_pOutputData;
+                retval = ConvertUTF8toUTF32(
+                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uInputDataLen,
+                    &pUtf32, pUtf32 + a_uOutputDataSize,
+                    lenientConversion);
+            }
+            else if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF16)) {
+                UTF16 * pUtf16 = (UTF16 *) a_pOutputData;
+                retval = ConvertUTF8toUTF16(
+                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uInputDataLen,
+                    &pUtf16, pUtf16 + a_uOutputDataSize,
+                    lenientConversion);
+            }
+            return retval == conversionOK;
+        }
+        else {
+            size_t retval = mbstowcs(a_pOutputData,
+                a_pInputData, a_uOutputDataSize);
+            return retval != (size_t)(-1);
+        }
+    }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
+     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
+     *                       bytes required to be converted to storage format.
+     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
+     *                       converted to storage format. This size always
+     *                       includes space for the terminating NULL character.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeToStore(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData)
+    {
+        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
+            // worst case scenario for wchar_t to UTF-8 is 1 wchar_t -> 6 char
+            size_t uLen = 0;
+            while (a_pInputData[uLen]) {
+                ++uLen;
+            }
+            return (6 * uLen) + 1;
+        }
+        else {
+            size_t uLen = wcstombs(NULL, a_pInputData, 0);
+            if (uLen == (size_t)(-1)) {
+                return uLen;
+            }
+            return uLen + 1; // include NULL terminator
+        }
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
+     *                       the data will be converted including the
+     *                       terminating NULL character.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
+     *                       string.
+     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
+     *                       terminating NULL character was successfully
+     *                       converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertToStore(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData,
+        char *          a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize
+        )
+    {
+        if (m_bStoreIsUtf8) {
+            // calc input string length (SI_CHAR type and size independent)
+            size_t uInputLen = 0;
+            while (a_pInputData[uInputLen]) {
+                ++uInputLen;
+            }
+            ++uInputLen; // include the NULL char
+
+            // This uses the Unicode reference implementation to do the
+            // conversion from wchar_t to UTF-8. The required files are
+            // ConvertUTF.h and ConvertUTF.c which should be included in
+            // the distribution but are publically available from unicode.org
+            // at http://www.unicode.org/Public/PROGRAMS/CVTUTF/
+            ConversionResult retval;
+            UTF8 * pUtf8 = (UTF8 *) a_pOutputData;
+            if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF32)) {
+                const UTF32 * pUtf32 = (const UTF32 *) a_pInputData;
+                retval = ConvertUTF32toUTF8(
+                    &pUtf32, pUtf32 + uInputLen,
+                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uOutputDataSize,
+                    lenientConversion);
+            }
+            else if (sizeof(wchar_t) == sizeof(UTF16)) {
+                const UTF16 * pUtf16 = (const UTF16 *) a_pInputData;
+                retval = ConvertUTF16toUTF8(
+                    &pUtf16, pUtf16 + uInputLen,
+                    &pUtf8, pUtf8 + a_uOutputDataSize,
+                    lenientConversion);
+            }
+            return retval == conversionOK;
+        }
+        else {
+            size_t retval = wcstombs(a_pOutputData,
+                a_pInputData, a_uOutputDataSize);
+            return retval != (size_t) -1;
+        }
+    }
+};
+
+#endif // SI_CONVERT_GENERIC
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//                              SI_CONVERT_ICU
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#ifdef SI_CONVERT_ICU
+
+#define SI_Case     SI_GenericCase
+#define SI_NoCase   SI_GenericNoCase
+
+#include 
+
+/**
+ * Converts MBCS/UTF-8 to UChar using ICU. This can be used on all platforms.
+ */
+template
+class SI_ConvertW {
+    const char * m_pEncoding;
+    UConverter * m_pConverter;
+protected:
+    SI_ConvertW() : m_pEncoding(NULL), m_pConverter(NULL) { }
+public:
+    SI_ConvertW(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) : m_pConverter(NULL) {
+        m_pEncoding = a_bStoreIsUtf8 ? "UTF-8" : NULL;
+    }
+
+    /* copy and assignment */
+    SI_ConvertW(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
+    SI_ConvertW & operator=(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) {
+        m_pEncoding = rhs.m_pEncoding;
+        m_pConverter = NULL;
+        return *this;
+    }
+    ~SI_ConvertW() { if (m_pConverter) ucnv_close(m_pConverter); }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of UChar required for converting the input
+     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to UChar.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @return              Number of UChar required by the string when
+     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
+     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
+     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
+    {
+        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
+
+        UErrorCode nError;
+
+        if (!m_pConverter) {
+            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
+            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
+                return (size_t) -1;
+            }
+        }
+
+        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+        ucnv_resetToUnicode(m_pConverter);
+        int32_t nLen = ucnv_toUChars(m_pConverter, NULL, 0,
+            a_pInputData, (int32_t) a_uInputDataLen, &nError);
+        if (nError != U_BUFFER_OVERFLOW_ERROR) {
+            return (size_t) -1;
+        }
+
+        return (size_t) nLen;
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to UChar.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to UChar.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
+     *                      converted data.
+     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in UChar.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
+     *                      converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
+        UChar *         a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
+    {
+        UErrorCode nError;
+
+        if (!m_pConverter) {
+            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
+            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
+                return false;
+            }
+        }
+
+        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+        ucnv_resetToUnicode(m_pConverter);
+        ucnv_toUChars(m_pConverter,
+            a_pOutputData, (int32_t) a_uOutputDataSize,
+            a_pInputData, (int32_t) a_uInputDataLen, &nError);
+        if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
+            return false;
+        }
+
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
+     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
+     *                      bytes required to be converted to storage format.
+     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
+     *                      converted to storage format. This size always
+     *                      includes space for the terminating NULL character.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeToStore(
+        const UChar * a_pInputData)
+    {
+        UErrorCode nError;
+
+        if (!m_pConverter) {
+            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
+            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
+                return (size_t) -1;
+            }
+        }
+
+        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+        ucnv_resetFromUnicode(m_pConverter);
+        int32_t nLen = ucnv_fromUChars(m_pConverter, NULL, 0,
+            a_pInputData, -1, &nError);
+        if (nError != U_BUFFER_OVERFLOW_ERROR) {
+            return (size_t) -1;
+        }
+
+        return (size_t) nLen + 1;
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
+     *                      the data will be converted including the
+     *                      terminating NULL character.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
+     *                      string.
+     * @param a_pOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
+     *                      terminating NULL character was successfully
+     *                      converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertToStore(
+        const UChar *   a_pInputData,
+        char *          a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
+    {
+        UErrorCode nError;
+
+        if (!m_pConverter) {
+            nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+            m_pConverter = ucnv_open(m_pEncoding, &nError);
+            if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
+                return false;
+            }
+        }
+
+        nError = U_ZERO_ERROR;
+        ucnv_resetFromUnicode(m_pConverter);
+        ucnv_fromUChars(m_pConverter,
+            a_pOutputData, (int32_t) a_uOutputDataSize,
+            a_pInputData, -1, &nError);
+        if (U_FAILURE(nError)) {
+            return false;
+        }
+
+        return true;
+    }
+};
+
+#endif // SI_CONVERT_ICU
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//                              SI_CONVERT_WIN32
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#ifdef SI_CONVERT_WIN32
+
+#define SI_Case     SI_GenericCase
+
+// Windows CE doesn't have errno or MBCS libraries
+#ifdef _WIN32_WCE
+# ifndef SI_NO_MBCS
+#  define SI_NO_MBCS
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#include 
+#ifdef SI_NO_MBCS
+# define SI_NoCase   SI_GenericNoCase
+#else // !SI_NO_MBCS
+/**
+ * Case-insensitive comparison class using Win32 MBCS functions. This class
+ * returns a case-insensitive semi-collation order for MBCS text. It may not
+ * be safe for UTF-8 text returned in char format as we don't know what
+ * characters will be folded by the function! Therefore, if you are using
+ * SI_CHAR == char and SetUnicode(true), then you need to use the generic
+ * SI_NoCase class instead.
+ */
+#include 
+template
+struct SI_NoCase {
+    bool operator()(const SI_CHAR * pLeft, const SI_CHAR * pRight) const {
+        if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(char)) {
+            return _mbsicmp((const unsigned char *)pLeft,
+                (const unsigned char *)pRight) < 0;
+        }
+        if (sizeof(SI_CHAR) == sizeof(wchar_t)) {
+            return _wcsicmp((const wchar_t *)pLeft,
+                (const wchar_t *)pRight) < 0;
+        }
+        return SI_GenericNoCase()(pLeft, pRight);
+    }
+};
+#endif // SI_NO_MBCS
+
+/**
+ * Converts MBCS and UTF-8 to a wchar_t (or equivalent) on Windows. This uses
+ * only the Win32 functions and doesn't require the external Unicode UTF-8
+ * conversion library. It will not work on Windows 95 without using Microsoft
+ * Layer for Unicode in your application.
+ */
+template
+class SI_ConvertW {
+    UINT m_uCodePage;
+protected:
+    SI_ConvertW() { }
+public:
+    SI_ConvertW(bool a_bStoreIsUtf8) {
+        m_uCodePage = a_bStoreIsUtf8 ? CP_UTF8 : CP_ACP;
+    }
+
+    /* copy and assignment */
+    SI_ConvertW(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) { operator=(rhs); }
+    SI_ConvertW & operator=(const SI_ConvertW & rhs) {
+        m_uCodePage = rhs.m_uCodePage;
+        return *this;
+    }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of SI_CHAR required for converting the input
+     * from the storage format. The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @return              Number of SI_CHAR required by the string when
+     *                      converted. If there are embedded NULL bytes in the
+     *                      input data, only the string up and not including
+     *                      the NULL byte will be converted.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen)
+    {
+        SI_ASSERT(a_uInputDataLen != (size_t) -1);
+
+        int retval = MultiByteToWideChar(
+            m_uCodePage, 0,
+            a_pInputData, (int) a_uInputDataLen,
+            0, 0);
+        return (size_t)(retval > 0 ? retval : -1);
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string from the storage format to SI_CHAR.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  Data in storage format to be converted to SI_CHAR.
+     * @param a_uInputDataLen Length of storage format data in bytes. This
+     *                      must be the actual length of the data, including
+     *                      NULL byte if NULL terminated string is required.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the output buffer to received the
+     *                      converted data.
+     * @param a_uOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in SI_CHAR.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data was successfully
+     *                      converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertFromStore(
+        const char *    a_pInputData,
+        size_t          a_uInputDataLen,
+        SI_CHAR *       a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
+    {
+        int nSize = MultiByteToWideChar(
+            m_uCodePage, 0,
+            a_pInputData, (int) a_uInputDataLen,
+            (wchar_t *) a_pOutputData, (int) a_uOutputDataSize);
+        return (nSize > 0);
+    }
+
+    /** Calculate the number of char required by the storage format of this
+     * data. The storage format is always UTF-8.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated string to calculate the number of
+     *                      bytes required to be converted to storage format.
+     * @return              Number of bytes required by the string when
+     *                      converted to storage format. This size always
+     *                      includes space for the terminating NULL character.
+     * @return              -1 cast to size_t on a conversion error.
+     */
+    size_t SizeToStore(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData)
+    {
+        int retval = WideCharToMultiByte(
+            m_uCodePage, 0,
+            (const wchar_t *) a_pInputData, -1,
+            0, 0, 0, 0);
+        return (size_t) (retval > 0 ? retval : -1);
+    }
+
+    /** Convert the input string to the storage format of this data.
+     * The storage format is always UTF-8 or MBCS.
+     *
+     * @param a_pInputData  NULL terminated source string to convert. All of
+     *                      the data will be converted including the
+     *                      terminating NULL character.
+     * @param a_pOutputData Pointer to the buffer to receive the converted
+     *                      string.
+     * @param a_pOutputDataSize Size of the output buffer in char.
+     * @return              true if all of the input data, including the
+     *                      terminating NULL character was successfully
+     *                      converted.
+     */
+    bool ConvertToStore(
+        const SI_CHAR * a_pInputData,
+        char *          a_pOutputData,
+        size_t          a_uOutputDataSize)
+    {
+        int retval = WideCharToMultiByte(
+            m_uCodePage, 0,
+            (const wchar_t *) a_pInputData, -1,
+            a_pOutputData, (int) a_uOutputDataSize, 0, 0);
+        return retval > 0;
+    }
+};
+
+#endif // SI_CONVERT_WIN32
+
+
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//                                  TYPE DEFINITIONS
+// ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertA >                 CSimpleIniA;
+typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertA >                   CSimpleIniCaseA;
+
+#if defined(SI_CONVERT_ICU)
+typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >               CSimpleIniW;
+typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >                 CSimpleIniCaseW;
+#else
+typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >           CSimpleIniW;
+typedef CSimpleIniTempl,SI_ConvertW >             CSimpleIniCaseW;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _UNICODE
+# define CSimpleIni      CSimpleIniW
+# define CSimpleIniCase  CSimpleIniCaseW
+# define SI_NEWLINE      SI_NEWLINE_W
+#else // !_UNICODE
+# define CSimpleIni      CSimpleIniA
+# define CSimpleIniCase  CSimpleIniCaseA
+# define SI_NEWLINE      SI_NEWLINE_A
+#endif // _UNICODE
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+# pragma warning (pop)
+#endif
+
+#endif // INCLUDED_SimpleIni_h
+
diff --git a/ini.syn b/ini.syn
index 718c560..b9c9d01 100644
--- a/ini.syn
+++ b/ini.syn
@@ -1,36 +1,36 @@
-; Syntax file for ini files - contributed by Brodie Thiesfield
-; 
-; Suggested Colors:
-;   Comments (;#)   Comments, Comments 2        Green
-;   Sections        Characters                  Red
-;   Values          Strings                     Blue
-
-C=1
-
-[Syntax]
-Namespace1 = 6
-IgnoreCase = Yes
-KeyWordLength = 1
-BracketChars =
-OperatorChars =
-PreprocStart = 
-SyntaxStart =
-SyntaxEnd =
-HexPrefix =
-CommentStart = 
-CommentEnd = 
-CommentStartAlt = 
-CommentEndAlt = 
-SingleComment = #
-SingleCommentCol =
-SingleCommentAlt = ;
-SingleCommentColAlt =
-SingleCommentEsc =
-StringsSpanLines = No
-StringStart = 
-StringEnd = 
-StringAlt = =
-StringEsc = 
-CharStart = [
-CharEnd = ]
-CharEsc =
+; Syntax file for ini files - contributed by Brodie Thiesfield
+; 
+; Suggested Colors:
+;   Comments (;#)   Comments, Comments 2        Green
+;   Sections        Characters                  Red
+;   Values          Strings                     Blue
+
+C=1
+
+[Syntax]
+Namespace1 = 6
+IgnoreCase = Yes
+KeyWordLength = 1
+BracketChars =
+OperatorChars =
+PreprocStart = 
+SyntaxStart =
+SyntaxEnd =
+HexPrefix =
+CommentStart = 
+CommentEnd = 
+CommentStartAlt = 
+CommentEndAlt = 
+SingleComment = #
+SingleCommentCol =
+SingleCommentAlt = ;
+SingleCommentColAlt =
+SingleCommentEsc =
+StringsSpanLines = No
+StringStart = 
+StringEnd = 
+StringAlt = =
+StringEsc = 
+CharStart = [
+CharEnd = ]
+CharEsc =
diff --git a/simpleini.doxy b/simpleini.doxy
index 6a27221..b9291e7 100644
--- a/simpleini.doxy
+++ b/simpleini.doxy
@@ -1,1321 +1,1321 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.5.4
-
-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
-#
-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
-# The format is:
-#       TAG = value [value, ...]
-# For lists items can also be appended using:
-#       TAG += value [value, ...]
-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Project related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file that 
-# follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text before 
-# the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built into 
-# libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of 
-# possible encodings.
-
-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
-
-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded 
-# by quotes) that should identify the project.
-
-PROJECT_NAME           = SimpleIni
-
-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. 
-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or 
-# if some version control system is used.
-
-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 
-
-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) 
-# base path where the generated documentation will be put. 
-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location 
-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
-
-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = D:/src/simpleini-doc
-
-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 
-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output 
-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. 
-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of 
-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would 
-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
-
-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
-
-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all 
-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this 
-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. 
-# The default language is English, other supported languages are: 
-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, 
-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, 
-# Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), Korean, 
-# Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, 
-# Serbian, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
-
-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
-
-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in 
-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). 
-# Set to NO to disable this.
-
-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
-
-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend 
-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. 
-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the 
-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
-
-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
-
-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator 
-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string 
-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be 
-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is 
-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. 
-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically 
-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" 
-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" 
-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
-
-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class  " \
-                         "The $name widget  " \
-                         "The $name file  " \
-                         is \
-                         provides \
-                         specifies \
-                         contains \
-                         represents \
-                         a \
-                         an \
-                         the
-
-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then 
-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief 
-# description.
-
-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
-
-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all 
-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those 
-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment 
-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
-
-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full 
-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set 
-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
-
-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
-
-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag 
-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is 
-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of 
-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. 
-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the 
-# path to strip.
-
-STRIP_FROM_PATH        = "D:/src/simpleini/  "
-
-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of 
-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells 
-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. 
-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class 
-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that 
-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
-
-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    = 
-
-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter 
-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems 
-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
-
-SHORT_NAMES            = NO
-
-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen 
-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style 
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc 
-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments 
-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
-
-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = YES
-
-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will 
-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style 
-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments 
-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring 
-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
-
-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
-
-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen 
-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// 
-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. 
-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed 
-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
-
-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
-
-# If the DETAILS_AT_TOP tag is set to YES then Doxygen 
-# will output the detailed description near the top, like JavaDoc.
-# If set to NO, the detailed description appears after the member 
-# documentation.
-
-DETAILS_AT_TOP         = NO
-
-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented 
-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it 
-# re-implements.
-
-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
-
-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce 
-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will 
-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
-
-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
-
-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. 
-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
-
-TAB_SIZE               = 4
-
-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts 
-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". 
-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to 
-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which 
-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". 
-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
-
-ALIASES                = 
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C 
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. 
-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list 
-# of all members will be omitted, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = NO
-
-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java 
-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for Java. 
-# For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified scopes 
-# will look different, etc.
-
-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
-
-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want to 
-# include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should 
-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and 
-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. 
-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration 
-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
-
-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
-
-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
-# enable parsing support.
-
-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
-
-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. 
-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public 
-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
-
-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
-
-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC 
-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first 
-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default 
-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
-
-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
-
-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of 
-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a 
-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to 
-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using 
-# the \nosubgrouping command.
-
-SUBGROUPING            = YES
-
-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct (or union) is 
-# documented as struct with the name of the typedef. So 
-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct 
-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, 
-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically 
-# be useful for C code where the coding convention is that all structs are 
-# typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced never the struct's name.
-
-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Build related configuration options
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in 
-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. 
-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless 
-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
-
-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class 
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = NO
-
-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file 
-# will be included in the documentation.
-
-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
-
-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) 
-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. 
-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
-
-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local 
-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in 
-# the interface are included in the documentation. 
-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
-
-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
-
-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be extracted 
-# and appear in the documentation as a namespace called 'anonymous_namespace{file}', 
-# where file will be replaced with the base name of the file that contains the anonymous 
-# namespace. By default anonymous namespace are hidden.
-
-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. 
-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the 
-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. 
-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. 
-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various 
-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. 
-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the 
-# documentation.
-
-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any 
-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. 
-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the 
-# function's detailed documentation block.
-
-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
-
-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation 
-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set 
-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. 
-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
-
-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
-
-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate 
-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also 
-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ 
-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows 
-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
-
-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen 
-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the 
-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
-
-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
-
-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation 
-# of that file.
-
-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
-
-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] 
-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
-
-INLINE_INFO            = YES
-
-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen 
-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members 
-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in 
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
-
-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the 
-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically 
-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in 
-# declaration order.
-
-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
-
-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be 
-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to 
-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, 
-# not including the namespace part. 
-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the 
-# alphabetical list.
-
-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
-
-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo 
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = YES
-
-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test 
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = YES
-
-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug 
-# commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = YES
-
-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting 
-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
-
-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
-
-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional 
-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
-
-ENABLED_SECTIONS       = 
-
-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines 
-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in 
-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified 
-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. 
-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the 
-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer 
-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
-
-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
-
-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated 
-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the 
-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
-
-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
-
-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories 
-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy 
-# in the documentation. The default is NO.
-
-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = NO
-
-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that 
-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from the 
-# version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via 
-# popen()) the command  , where  is the value of 
-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and  is the name of an input file 
-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output 
-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
-
-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    = 
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated 
-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-QUIET                  = NO
-
-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are 
-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank 
-# NO is used.
-
-WARNINGS               = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings 
-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will 
-# automatically be disabled.
-
-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
-
-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for 
-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some 
-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that 
-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
-
-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
-
-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for 
-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters 
-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about 
-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of 
-# documentation.
-
-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
-
-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that 
-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text 
-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the 
-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain 
-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could 
-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
-
-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file($line) : $text  "
-
-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning 
-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written 
-# to stderr.
-
-WARN_LOGFILE           = 
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the input files
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain 
-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or 
-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories 
-# with spaces.
-
-INPUT                  = D:/src/simpleini/SimpleIni.h
-
-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files that 
-# doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is also the default 
-# input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. 
-# See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
-
-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
-# blank the following patterns are tested: 
-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx 
-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
-
-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h
-
-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories 
-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. 
-# If left blank NO is used.
-
-RECURSIVE              = NO
-
-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should 
-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a 
-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
-
-EXCLUDE                = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or 
-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded 
-# from the input.
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
-
-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude 
-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched 
-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories 
-# for example use the pattern */test/*
-
-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
-
-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names 
-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the output. 
-# The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the wildcard * is used, 
-# a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
-
-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = 
-
-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see 
-# the \include command).
-
-EXAMPLE_PATH           = 
-
-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the 
-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
-# blank all files are included.
-
-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
-
-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be 
-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude 
-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. 
-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
-
-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
-
-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see 
-# the \image command).
-
-IMAGE_PATH             = 
-
-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should 
-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program 
-# by executing (via popen()) the command  , where  
-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and  is the name of an 
-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes 
-# to standard output.  If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be 
-# ignored.
-
-INPUT_FILTER           = 
-
-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern 
-# basis.  Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the 
-# filter if there is a match.  The filters are a list of the form: 
-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further 
-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER 
-# is applied to all files.
-
-FILTER_PATTERNS        = 
-
-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using 
-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source 
-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
-
-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to source browsing
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will 
-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. 
-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also 
-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. If you have enabled CALL_GRAPH or CALLER_GRAPH 
-# then you must also enable this option. If you don't then doxygen will produce 
-# a warning and turn it on anyway
-
-SOURCE_BROWSER         = YES
-
-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body 
-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
-
-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
-
-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct 
-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code 
-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
-
-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES (the default) 
-# then for each documented function all documented 
-# functions referencing it will be listed.
-
-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES (the default) 
-# then for each documented function all documented entities 
-# called/used by that function will be listed.
-
-REFERENCES_RELATION    = YES
-
-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
-# link to the source code.  Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
-
-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = YES
-
-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code 
-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen 
-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source 
-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You 
-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
-
-USE_HTAGS              = NO
-
-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for 
-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
-
-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index 
-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project 
-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
-
-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = NO
-
-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then 
-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns 
-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
-
-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
-
-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all 
-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. 
-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that 
-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
-
-IGNORE_PREFIX          = 
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the HTML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# generate HTML output.
-
-GENERATE_HTML          = YES
-
-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. 
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
-
-HTML_OUTPUT            = html
-
-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for 
-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank 
-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
-
-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
-
-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for 
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
-# standard header.
-
-HTML_HEADER            = 
-
-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for 
-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
-# standard footer.
-
-HTML_FOOTER            = 
-
-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading 
-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to 
-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen 
-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy 
-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own 
-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
-
-HTML_STYLESHEET        = 
-
-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, 
-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to 
-# NO a bullet list will be used.
-
-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files 
-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the 
-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compressed HTML help file (.chm) 
-# of the generated HTML documentation.
-
-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
-
-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML 
-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the 
-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports 
-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox 
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
-
-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can 
-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You 
-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be 
-# written to the html output directory.
-
-CHM_FILE               = 
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can 
-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of 
-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run 
-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
-
-HHC_LOCATION           = 
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag 
-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that 
-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
-
-GENERATE_CHI           = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag 
-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a 
-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
-
-BINARY_TOC             = NO
-
-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members 
-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
-
-TOC_EXPAND             = NO
-
-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at 
-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and 
-# the value YES disables it.
-
-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
-
-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) 
-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
-
-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 4
-
-# If the GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is set to YES, a side panel will be
-# generated containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that 
-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports 
-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, 
-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are 
-# probably better off using the HTML help feature.
-
-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = NO
-
-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be 
-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree 
-# is shown.
-
-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# generate Latex output.
-
-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
-
-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. 
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
-
-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
-
-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be 
-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
-
-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
-
-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to 
-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the 
-# default command name.
-
-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
-
-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
-
-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used 
-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and 
-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
-
-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
-
-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX 
-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
-
-EXTRA_PACKAGES         = 
-
-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for 
-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until 
-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
-
-LATEX_HEADER           = 
-
-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated 
-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will 
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references 
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
-
-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of 
-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a 
-# higher quality PDF documentation.
-
-USE_PDFLATEX           = NO
-
-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. 
-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep 
-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. 
-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
-
-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
-
-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not 
-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) 
-# in the output.
-
-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the RTF output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output 
-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with 
-# other RTF readers or editors.
-
-GENERATE_RTF           = NO
-
-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. 
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
-
-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
-
-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
-# save some trees in general.
-
-COMPACT_RTF            = NO
-
-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated 
-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will 
-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. 
-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other 
-# programs which support those fields. 
-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
-
-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
-
-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's 
-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide 
-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
-
-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    = 
-
-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. 
-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
-
-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    = 
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the man page output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# generate man pages
-
-GENERATE_MAN           = NO
-
-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. 
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
-
-MAN_OUTPUT             = man
-
-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to 
-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
-
-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
-
-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, 
-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity 
-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files 
-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command 
-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
-
-MAN_LINKS              = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the XML output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of 
-# the code including all documentation.
-
-GENERATE_XML           = NO
-
-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. 
-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
-
-XML_OUTPUT             = xml
-
-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, 
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_SCHEMA             = 
-
-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, 
-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
-# syntax of the XML files.
-
-XML_DTD                = 
-
-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting 
-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that 
-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
-
-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file 
-# that captures the structure of the code including all 
-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental 
-# and incomplete at the moment.
-
-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# configuration options related to the Perl module output
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of 
-# the code including all documentation. Note that this 
-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the 
-# moment.
-
-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate 
-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able 
-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
-
-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
-
-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be 
-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.  This is useful 
-# if you want to understand what is going on.  On the other hand, if this 
-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller 
-# and Perl will parse it just the same.
-
-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
-
-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file 
-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. 
-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same 
-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
-
-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = 
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor   
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include 
-# files.
-
-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro 
-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional 
-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled 
-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
-
-MACRO_EXPANSION        = NO
-
-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES 
-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the 
-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
-
-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = NO
-
-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files 
-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
-
-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
-
-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by 
-# the preprocessor.
-
-INCLUDE_PATH           = 
-
-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard 
-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the 
-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will 
-# be used.
-
-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  = 
-
-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that 
-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of 
-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name 
-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are 
-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being 
-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator 
-# instead of the = operator.
-
-PREDEFINED             = SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE \
-                         SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
-
-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then 
-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. 
-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. 
-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
-
-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = 
-
-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then 
-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone 
-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such 
-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse 
-# the parser if not removed.
-
-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to external references   
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. 
-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation 
-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without 
-# this location is as follows: 
-#   TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... 
-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: 
-#   TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... 
-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or 
-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool 
-# does not have to be run to correct the links.
-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
-# (where the name does NOT include the path)
-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen 
-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
-
-TAGFILES               = 
-
-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create 
-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
-
-GENERATE_TAGFILE       = 
-
-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed 
-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes 
-# will be listed.
-
-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
-
-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed 
-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will 
-# be listed.
-
-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
-
-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script 
-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
-
-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration options related to the dot tool   
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base 
-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that 
-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a 
-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more 
-# powerful graphs.
-
-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = YES
-
-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc 
-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to 
-# produce the chart and insert it in the documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to 
-# specify the directory where the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to 
-# be found in the default search path.
-
-MSCGEN_PATH            = 
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide 
-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented 
-# or is not a class.
-
-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
-
-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is 
-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization 
-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section 
-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
-
-HAVE_DOT               = NO
-
-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the 
-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
-
-CLASS_GRAPH            = YES
-
-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and 
-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
-
-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = YES
-
-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
-
-GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES
-
-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and 
-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling 
-# Language.
-
-UML_LOOK               = NO
-
-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the 
-# relations between templates and their instances.
-
-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT 
-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented 
-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with 
-# other documented files.
-
-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES
-
-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and 
-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each 
-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or 
-# indirectly include this file.
-
-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES
-
-# If the CALL_GRAPH, SOURCE_BROWSER and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will 
-# generate a call dependency graph for every global function or class method. 
-# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. 
-# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected 
-# functions only using the \callgraph command.
-
-CALL_GRAPH             = NO
-
-# If the CALLER_GRAPH, SOURCE_BROWSER and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will 
-# generate a caller dependency graph for every global function or class method. 
-# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. 
-# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected 
-# functions only using the \callergraph command.
-
-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
-
-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
-
-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = YES
-
-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES 
-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories 
-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
-# relations between the files in the directories.
-
-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES
-
-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images 
-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
-# If left blank png will be used.
-
-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
-
-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be 
-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
-
-DOT_PATH               = 
-
-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the 
-# \dotfile command).
-
-DOTFILE_DIRS           = 
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of 
-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph 
-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is 
-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number 
-# of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than 
-# MAX_DOT_GRAPH_NOTES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note 
-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
-
-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 50
-
-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the 
-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable 
-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes 
-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this 
-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large 
-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by 
-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
-
-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 1000
-
-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent 
-# background. This is disabled by default, which results in a white background. 
-# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to 
-# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to 
-# read).
-
-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = NO
-
-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output 
-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This 
-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) 
-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
-
-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
-
-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and 
-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
-
-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
-
-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate 
-# the various graphs.
-
-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
-
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# Configuration::additions related to the search engine   
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be 
-# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
-
-SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+# Doxyfile 1.5.4
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file that 
+# follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text before 
+# the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built into 
+# libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of 
+# possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded 
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = SimpleIni
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. 
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or 
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) 
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location 
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = D:/src/simpleini-doc
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output 
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. 
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of 
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would 
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all 
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this 
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. 
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are: 
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, 
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, 
+# Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), Korean, 
+# Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, 
+# Serbian, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in 
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). 
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend 
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. 
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the 
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator 
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string 
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be 
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is 
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. 
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically 
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" 
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" 
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class  " \
+                         "The $name widget  " \
+                         "The $name file  " \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then 
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief 
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all 
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those 
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment 
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full 
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set 
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag 
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is 
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of 
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. 
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the 
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        = "D:/src/simpleini/  "
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of 
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells 
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. 
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class 
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that 
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    = 
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter 
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems 
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = NO
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen 
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style 
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc 
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments 
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = YES
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will 
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style 
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments 
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring 
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen 
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// 
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. 
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed 
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the DETAILS_AT_TOP tag is set to YES then Doxygen 
+# will output the detailed description near the top, like JavaDoc.
+# If set to NO, the detailed description appears after the member 
+# documentation.
+
+DETAILS_AT_TOP         = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented 
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it 
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce 
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will 
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. 
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts 
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". 
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to 
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which 
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". 
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                = 
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. 
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list 
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java 
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for Java. 
+# For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified scopes 
+# will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want to 
+# include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should 
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and 
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. 
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration 
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. 
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public 
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC 
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first 
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default 
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of 
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a 
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to 
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using 
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct (or union) is 
+# documented as struct with the name of the typedef. So 
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct 
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, 
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically 
+# be useful for C code where the coding convention is that all structs are 
+# typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced never the struct's name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in 
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. 
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless 
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class 
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file 
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) 
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. 
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local 
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in 
+# the interface are included in the documentation. 
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be extracted 
+# and appear in the documentation as a namespace called 'anonymous_namespace{file}', 
+# where file will be replaced with the base name of the file that contains the anonymous 
+# namespace. By default anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the 
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. 
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various 
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all 
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the 
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any 
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. 
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the 
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation 
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set 
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. 
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate 
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also 
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ 
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows 
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the 
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation 
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] 
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen 
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members 
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in 
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the 
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically 
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in 
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be 
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to 
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, 
+# not including the namespace part. 
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the 
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug 
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or 
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting 
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional 
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       = 
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines 
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in 
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified 
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. 
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the 
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer 
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated 
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the 
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories 
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy 
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = NO
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that 
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from the 
+# version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via 
+# popen()) the command  , where  is the value of 
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and  is the name of an input file 
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output 
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated 
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = NO
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are 
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank 
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings 
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will 
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for 
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some 
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that 
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for 
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters 
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about 
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of 
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that 
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text 
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the 
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain 
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could 
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file($line) : $text  "
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning 
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written 
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain 
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or 
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories 
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = D:/src/simpleini/SimpleIni.h
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files that 
+# doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is also the default 
+# input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. 
+# See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
+# blank the following patterns are tested: 
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx 
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories 
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. 
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = NO
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should 
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a 
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or 
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded 
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude 
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched 
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories 
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names 
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the output. 
+# The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the wildcard * is used, 
+# a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = 
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see 
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           = 
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the 
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp 
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left 
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be 
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude 
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. 
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or 
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see 
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             = 
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should 
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program 
+# by executing (via popen()) the command  , where  
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and  is the name of an 
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes 
+# to standard output.  If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be 
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           = 
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern 
+# basis.  Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the 
+# filter if there is a match.  The filters are a list of the form: 
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further 
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER 
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        = 
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using 
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source 
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will 
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. 
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also 
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. If you have enabled CALL_GRAPH or CALLER_GRAPH 
+# then you must also enable this option. If you don't then doxygen will produce 
+# a warning and turn it on anyway
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = YES
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body 
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct 
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code 
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES (the default) 
+# then for each documented function all documented 
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES (the default) 
+# then for each documented function all documented entities 
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.  Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code 
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen 
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source 
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You 
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen 
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for 
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index 
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project 
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = NO
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then 
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns 
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all 
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. 
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that 
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for 
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank 
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for 
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            = 
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for 
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            = 
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading 
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to 
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen 
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy 
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own 
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        = 
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, 
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to 
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files 
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the 
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compressed HTML help file (.chm) 
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML 
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the 
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports 
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox 
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can 
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You 
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be 
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can 
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of 
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run 
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           = 
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag 
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that 
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag 
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a 
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members 
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = NO
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at 
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and 
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) 
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 4
+
+# If the GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is set to YES, a side panel will be
+# generated containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that 
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports 
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, 
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are 
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be 
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree 
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be 
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to 
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the 
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used 
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and 
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX 
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         = 
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for 
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until 
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a 
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           = 
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated 
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will 
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references 
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of 
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a 
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. 
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep 
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. 
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not 
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) 
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output 
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with 
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact 
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to 
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated 
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will 
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. 
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other 
+# programs which support those fields. 
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's 
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide 
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    = 
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. 
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to 
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, 
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity 
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files 
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command 
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of 
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. 
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be 
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, 
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             = 
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, 
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the 
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                = 
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting 
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that 
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file 
+# that captures the structure of the code including all 
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental 
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will 
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of 
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this 
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the 
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate 
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able 
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be 
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.  This is useful 
+# if you want to understand what is going on.  On the other hand, if this 
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller 
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file 
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. 
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same 
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = 
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include 
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro 
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional 
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled 
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = NO
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES 
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the 
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = NO
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files 
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by 
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           = 
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard 
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the 
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will 
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  = 
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that 
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of 
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name 
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are 
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being 
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator 
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = SI_HAS_WIDE_FILE \
+                         SI_SUPPORT_IOSTREAMS
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then 
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. 
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. 
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = 
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then 
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone 
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such 
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse 
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. 
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation 
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without 
+# this location is as follows: 
+#   TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... 
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: 
+#   TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... 
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or 
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool 
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen 
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               = 
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create 
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       = 
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed 
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes 
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed 
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will 
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script 
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base 
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that 
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a 
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more 
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = YES
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc 
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to 
+# produce the chart and insert it in the documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to 
+# specify the directory where the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to 
+# be found in the default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            = 
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide 
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented 
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is 
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization 
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section 
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the 
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = YES
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and 
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and 
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = YES
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and 
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling 
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the 
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT 
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented 
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with 
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and 
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each 
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or 
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH, SOURCE_BROWSER and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will 
+# generate a call dependency graph for every global function or class method. 
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. 
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected 
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH, SOURCE_BROWSER and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will 
+# generate a caller dependency graph for every global function or class method. 
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. 
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected 
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen 
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = YES
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES 
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories 
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images 
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be 
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               = 
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that 
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the 
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           = 
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of 
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph 
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is 
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number 
+# of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than 
+# MAX_DOT_GRAPH_NOTES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note 
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 50
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the 
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable 
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes 
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this 
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large 
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by 
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 1000
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent 
+# background. This is disabled by default, which results in a white background. 
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to 
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to 
+# read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = NO
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output 
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This 
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) 
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and 
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will 
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate 
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine   
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be 
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
diff --git a/test1-expected.ini b/test1-expected.ini
index d2404b6..0964b1a 100644
--- a/test1-expected.ini
+++ b/test1-expected.ini
@@ -1,75 +1,75 @@
-; testsi-UTF8-std.ini : standard UTF-8 test file for SimpleIni automated testing
-;
-; The number after a section or key is the order that it is defined in this file
-; to make it easier to see if it has been written out correctly. This file should
-; be loaded with Unicode / MultiKey / MultiLine turned on.
-
-
-
-; This comment should be joined on to the one below it about the key
-; with no section.
-
-; Key with no section
-lonely-key=nosection
-another=nosection either
-
-
+; testsi-UTF8-std.ini : standard UTF-8 test file for SimpleIni automated testing
+;
+; The number after a section or key is the order that it is defined in this file
+; to make it easier to see if it has been written out correctly. This file should
+; be loaded with Unicode / MultiKey / MultiLine turned on.
+
+
+
+; This comment should be joined on to the one below it about the key
+; with no section.
+
+; Key with no section
+lonely-key=nosection
+another=nosection either
+
+
 ; This should be joined with the comment below about japanese.
 ; Another line which will be un-indented. 
 
-; This is a section of keys showing the word Japanese in different syllabies.
-[ordered-1]
-a-1=blah
-
-; this is in kanji
-japanese-2=日本語
-
-; this is in hiragana
-japanese-3=にほんご
-
-; this is in katakana
-japanese-4=ニホンゴ
-
-; this is in romaji
-japanese-5=nihongo
-
-; kanji as the key
-日本語-6=japanese
-
-
-[multi-2]
-
-; value a
-test=a
-test=b
-test=c
-test=d
-
-
-[multiline-3]
-
-; This is obviously a multi-line entry
-multiline-1=<<